Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration

Guide

Release 3.0

June 2004

Corporate Headquarters

Cisco Systems, Inc.

170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-1706

USA http://www.cisco.com Tel: 408 526-4000

800 553-NETS (6387) Fax: 408 526-4100

Text Part Number: OL-2521-01 D0

THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT

NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE

PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR

APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.

THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION

PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO

LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.

The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB???s public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright ?? 1981, Regents of the University of California.

NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED

???AS IS??? WITH ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND

NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.

IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL

DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR

INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

CCIP, CCSP, the Cisco Arrow logo, the Cisco Powered Network mark, Cisco Unity, Follow Me Browsing, FormShare, and StackWise are trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; Changing the Way We Work, Live, Play, and Learn, and iQuick Study are service marks of Cisco Systems, Inc.; and Aironet, ASIST, BPX, Catalyst, CCDA, CCDP, CCIE, CCNA, CCNP, Cisco, the Cisco Certified Internetwork Expert logo, Cisco IOS, the Cisco IOS logo, Cisco Press, Cisco Systems, Cisco Systems Capital, the Cisco Systems logo, Empowering the Internet Generation, Enterprise/Solver, EtherChannel, EtherFast, EtherSwitch, Fast Step, GigaDrive, GigaStack, HomeLink, Internet Quotient, IOS, IP/TV, iQ Expertise, the iQ logo, iQ Net Readiness Scorecard, LightStream, Linksys, MeetingPlace, MGX, the Networkers logo, Networking Academy, Network Registrar, Packet, PIX, Post-Routing, Pre-Routing, ProConnect, RateMUX, Registrar, ScriptShare, SlideCast, SMARTnet, StrataView Plus, SwitchProbe, TeleRouter, The Fastest Way to Increase Your Internet Quotient, TransPath, and VCO are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries.

All other trademarks mentioned in this document or Website are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (0403R)

Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide

Copyright ?? 2004, Cisco Systems, Inc.

All rights reserved.

Contents

Contents

Contents

Configuring PNNI for AAL1/AAL2 SVCs 4-31

Configuring the ATM Network Side 4-31

Configuring PVC Connections for All Operating Modes 4-32

Configuring VoIP Switching/Trunking Operating Mode Parameters 4-34

Configuring AAL2 Trunking Operating Mode Parameters 4-36

Configuring Switched AAL2 PVC Operating Mode Parameters 4-38

Contents

Contents

I N D E X

Figures

T A B L E S

Tables

Preface

This preface describes the objectives, audience, organization, and conventions of the Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide.

Objectives

This document describes the features, functions, installation, operation, and command line interface of Cisco Voice Interworking Service Module (VISM) Release 3.0.

Audience

This document is intended for the following personnel:

???Technicians responsible for installing VISM cards on the Cisco MGX 8230, MGX 8250, and MGX 8850 shelf.

???Network administrators responsible for configuring the Cisco MGX 8850 shelf.

Cisco recommends that installers be familiar with electronic circuitry and wiring practices and have experience as an electronic or electromechanical technician. Installers and network administrators should also be familiar with Cisco switches and routers, T1 and E1 voice lines, and Cisco wide area networks. Cisco also recommends that you have a system administrator present who is familiar with your network and UNIX servers during the initial installation of a Cisco MGX 8000 Series platform.

Document Organization

This document contains the following chapters:

???Chapter 1, ???Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards,??? provides a general introduction to VISM and describes the hardware and software modules, and installation procedures.

???Chapter 2, ???Telephony Applications Using VISM,??? describes VISM applications for a variety of voice networking situations.

???Chapter 3, ???VISM Functional Description,??? describes VISM???s functional operation.

???Chapter 4, ???Configuring VISM Features,??? describes the initial mandatory configuration procedures for using VISM cards in each of the operating modes.

Preface

Related Documentation

???Chapter 5, ???CLI Commands,??? describes the syntax and semantics of each VISM command line interface command.

???Chapter 6, ???Troubleshooting Tips,??? describes VISM troubleshooting tools and techniques.

???Appendix A, ???VISM and VISM-PR Card Clocking Options,??? describes clocking configuration for both the VISM card and MGX 8000 Series platform PXM cards.

???Appendix B, ???VISM and VISM-PR???3.0 Specifications,??? describes the specifications of VISM Release 3.0.

Related Documentation

The following sections describe documentation you may need to reference as you use the VISM product.

Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) Multiservice Switch Release 3

The documentation for the installation and operation of the MGX 8850 Multiservice Switch for Release 3 is listed in Table 1.

Table 1 Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation

Preface

Related Documentation

Table 1 Cisco MGX 8850 (PXM45) Multiservice Switch Release 3 Documentation (continued)

MGX 8850 (PXM1) Multiservice Switch Release 1.2.10

The documentation for the installation and operation of the MGX 8850 (PXM1) Multiservice Switch is listed in Table 2.

Preface

Related Documentation

MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator Release 1.2.10

The documentation for the installation and operation of the MGX 8250 Edge Concentrator is listed in Table 3.

MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator Release 1.2.10

The documentation for the installation and operation of the MGX 8230 Edge Concentrator is listed in Table 4.

Preface

Conventions

Conventions

This publication uses the following conventions to describe commands:

???Bold type???indicates command names and user entry text.

???Italic type???indicates arguments for which you supply values.

???| |???vertical bars indicate optional arguments.

This publication uses the following conventions to describe examples:

???Courier font???indicates terminal sessions and system display information.

???Courier bold font???indicates user entry.

Preface

Obtaining Documentation

Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to materials not contained in this manual.

Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could result in equipment damage or loss of data.

Obtaining Documentation

Cisco documentation and additional literature are available on Cisco.com. Cisco also provides several ways to obtain technical assistance and other technical resources. These sections explain how to obtain technical information from Cisco Systems.

Cisco.com

You can access the most current Cisco documentation on the World Wide Web at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/univercd/home/home.htm

You can access the Cisco website at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com

International Cisco websites can be accessed from this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/public/countries_languages.shtml

Ordering Documentation

You can find instructions for ordering documentation at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/es_inpck/pdi.htm

You can order Cisco documentation in these ways:

???Registered Cisco.com users (Cisco direct customers) can order Cisco product documentation from the Ordering tool:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/partner/ordering/index.shtml

???Nonregistered Cisco.com users can order documentation through a local account representative by calling Cisco Systems Corporate Headquarters (California, USA) at 408 526-7208 or, elsewhere in North America, by calling 800 553-NETS (6387).

Documentation Feedback

You can submit e-mail comments about technical documentation to bug-doc@cisco.com.

Preface

Obtaining Technical Assistance

You can submit comments by using the response card (if present) behind the front cover of your document or by writing to the following address:

Cisco Systems

Attn: Customer Document Ordering

170 West Tasman Drive

San Jose, CA 95134-9883

We appreciate your comments.

Obtaining Technical Assistance

For all customers, partners, resellers, and distributors who hold valid Cisco service contracts, the Cisco Technical Assistance Center (TAC) provides 24-hour-a-day, award-winning technical support services, online and over the phone. Cisco.com features the Cisco TAC website as an online starting point for technical assistance. If you do not hold a valid Cisco service contract, please contact your reseller.

Cisco TAC Website

The Cisco TAC website provides online documents and tools for troubleshooting and resolving technical issues with Cisco products and technologies. The Cisco TAC website is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. The Cisco TAC website is located at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/tac

Accessing all the tools on the Cisco TAC website requires a Cisco.com user ID and password. If you have a valid service contract but do not have a login ID or password, register at this URL:

http://tools.cisco.com/RPF/register/register.do

Opening a TAC Case

Using the online TAC Case Open Tool is the fastest way to open P3 and P4 cases. (P3 and P4 cases are those in which your network is minimally impaired or for which you require product information.) After you describe your situation, the TAC Case Open Tool automatically recommends resources for an immediate solution. If your issue is not resolved using the recommended resources, your case will be assigned to a Cisco TAC engineer. The online TAC Case Open Tool is located at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/tac/caseopen

For P1 or P2 cases (P1 and P2 cases are those in which your production network is down or severely degraded) or if you do not have Internet access, contact Cisco TAC by telephone. Cisco TAC engineers are assigned immediately to P1 and P2 cases to help keep your business operations running smoothly.

To open a case by telephone, use one of the following numbers:

Asia-Pacific: +61 2 8446 7411 (Australia: 1 800 805 227)

EMEA: +32 2 704 55 55

USA: 1 800 553-2447

For a complete listing of Cisco TAC contacts, go to this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/warp/public/687/Directory/DirTAC.shtml

Preface

Obtaining Additional Publications and Information

TAC Case Priority Definitions

To ensure that all cases are reported in a standard format, Cisco has established case priority definitions.

Priority 1 (P1)???Your network is ???down??? or there is a critical impact to your business operations. You and Cisco will commit all necessary resources around the clock to resolve the situation.

Priority 2 (P2)???Operation of an existing network is severely degraded, or significant aspects of your business operation are negatively affected by inadequate performance of Cisco products. You and Cisco will commit full-time resources during normal business hours to resolve the situation.

Priority 3 (P3)???Operational performance of your network is impaired, but most business operations remain functional. You and Cisco will commit resources during normal business hours to restore service to satisfactory levels.

Priority 4 (P4)???You require information or assistance with Cisco product capabilities, installation, or configuration. There is little or no effect on your business operations.

Obtaining Additional Publications and Information

Information about Cisco products, technologies, and network solutions is available from various online and printed sources.

???Cisco Marketplace provides a variety of Cisco books, reference guides, and logo merchandise. Go to this URL to visit the company store:

http://www.cisco.com/go/marketplace/

???The Cisco Product Catalog describes the networking products offered by Cisco Systems, as well as ordering and customer support services. Access the Cisco Product Catalog at this URL:

http://cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/pcat/

???Cisco Press publishes a wide range of general networking, training and certification titles. Both new and experienced users will benefit from these publications. For current Cisco Press titles and other information, go to Cisco Press online at this URL:

http://www.ciscopress.com

???Packet magazine is the Cisco quarterly publication that provides the latest networking trends, technology breakthroughs, and Cisco products and solutions to help industry professionals get the most from their networking investment. Included are networking deployment and troubleshooting tips, configuration examples, customer case studies, tutorials and training, certification information, and links to numerous in-depth online resources. You can access Packet magazine at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/packet

???iQ Magazine is the Cisco bimonthly publication that delivers the latest information about Internet business strategies for executives. You can access iQ Magazine at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/go/iqmagazine

Preface

Obtaining Additional Publications and Information

???Internet Protocol Journal is a quarterly journal published by Cisco Systems for engineering professionals involved in designing, developing, and operating public and private internets and intranets. You can access the Internet Protocol Journal at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/ipj

???Training???Cisco offers world-class networking training. Current offerings in network training are listed at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/learning/index.html

Preface

Obtaining Additional Publications and Information

C H A P T E R 1

Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

This chapter provides a general introduction to VISM and VISM-PR and describes the hardware and software modules, and installation procedures. The following topics are described:

??????VISM and VISM-PR Card Types??? section on page 1-1

??????VISM and VISM-PR Card Physical Characteristics??? section on page 1-5

??????VISM and VISM-PR Card Features??? section on page 1-6

??????Installing VISM Hardware and Software??? section on page 1-13

??????Software Upgrades??? section on page 1-20

Note The term VISM is used to refer to the product software???either for the VISM card or for the VISM-PR card. The terms VISM and VISM-PR are used when discussing hardware only.

The VISM card, in combination with a Cisco MGX 8000 Series platform, enables telephone calls on conventional time-division multiplexed (TDM) voice circuits to be transported over an Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) packet-switched and VoIP networks. The VISM card is a single height card designed to operate in the following platforms:

???Cisco MGX 8850 Release 1, wide area switch

???Cisco MGX 8250, edge concentrator

???Cisco MGX 8230, edge concentrator

Note VISM is not supported on the Cisco MGX 8260 switch.

VISM and VISM-PR Card Types

VISM and VISM-PR cards are installed in Cisco MGX 8000 Series switches as front cards and their associated back cards???card sets. There are two types of VISM front cards (see Figure 1-1):

???AX-VISM-8T1???Supports up to eight T1 lines carrying digitized voice

???AX-VISM-8E1???Supports up to eight E1 lines carrying digitized voice

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

VISM and VISM-PR Card Types

Note Using the Service Resource Module (SRM) and the 1:N redundancy features, other physical configurations are supported. Refer to the ???VISM and VISM-PR Card Features??? section on page 1-6 for more details.

Figure 1-1 VISM T1 and E1 Front Cards

CLEI code label

ACT

STBY

FAIL

PORT 1

PORT 2

PORT 3

PORT 4

PORT 5

PORT 6

PORT 7

PORT 8

VISM

8T1

T1 front card

ACT

STBY

FAIL

PORT 1

PORT 2

PORT 3

PORT 4

PORT 5

PORT 6

PORT 7

PORT 8

VISM

8E1

E1 front card

18738

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

VISM and VISM-PR Card Types

There are two types of VISM-PR front cards (see Figure 1-2):

???MGX-VISM-PR-8T1???Supports up to eight T1 lines carrying digitized voice

???MGX-VISM-PR-8E1???Supports up to eight E1 lines carrying digitized voice

Figure 1-2 VISM-PR T1 and E1 Front Cards

Card Extractor

Release Slot

CLEI

Code Label

72673

The VISM and VISM-PR front cards have the same associated back cards. There are two types of VISM/VISM-PR T1 back cards (see Figure 1-3):

???AX-RJ48-8T1???Supports eight T1 lines using RJ-48 connectors; use with a T1 front card.

???AX-R-RJ48-8T1???Supports eight T1 lines; use with a redundant T1 front card.

There are four types of VISM/VISM-PR E1 back cards (see Figure 1-3):

???AX-RJ48-8E1???Supports eight E1 lines using RJ-48 connectors; use with an E1 front card.

???AX-R-RJ48-8E1???Supports eight E1 lines; use with a redundant E1 front card.

???AX-SMB-8E1???Supports eight E1 lines using SMB connectors; use with an E1 front card.

???AX-R-SMB-8E1???Supports eight E1 lines; use with a redundant E1 front card.

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

VISM and VISM-PR Card Types

Figure 1-3 VISM T1 and E1 Back Cards

71218

The VISM or VISM-PR card and MGX 8000 Series switch combination provides an interface, or voice gateway, between conventional TDM networks and packet-switched networks (see Figure 1-4).

Figure 1-4 Cisco MGX 8850 and VISM as a Voice Gateway

Voice/TDM Networks

Packet Network

(IP/ATM)

Packet Networks

31427

Connection to the packet network is performed by Cisco MGX 8000 Series switch Processor Module cards???PXM1, PXM1E, and PXM45???which communicate with a VISM card through the switch???s midplane cellbus. Refer to the documents listed in Table 5 of the ???Related Documentation??? section on page xiv for more information on the MGX 8000 Series switch midplane cellbus.

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

VISM and VISM-PR Card Physical Characteristics

VISM and VISM-PR Card Service Types

VISM cards are configured with the following service types:

???Constant bit rate (CBR)

Note CBR is not supported with a combination of a PXM1 with either an RPM or external router.

???Variable bit rate real time, VBR (RT)

???VBR non-real time (NRT)

VISM-PR card connections with the RPM-PR card requires the VBR (NRT) 3 service type on the PXM1E and PXM45 platforms.

If you are using a VISM-PR card in combination with a PXM1E, PXM45, or RPM-PR card, you must use the VBR (NRT) 3 selection when adding a connection.

The following connection service types can be configured with VISM 3.0 and higher:

???VBR (RT) 2

???VBR (RT) 3

???VBR (NRT) 2

VISM and VISM-PR Card Physical Characteristics

VISM cards are equipped with the following:

???Eight T1 or E1 ports

???Digital signal processors (DSPs)

???High-level data link control (HDLC) framer

???Broadband interface to the packet network

VISM Card Architecture

VISM card architecture provides the following:

???Flexibility that allows the incorporation of new or improved technology as it becomes available.

???Application flexibility that allows VISM to be used in a range of situations that provide interoperability with a wide variety of equipment types.

???Modularity that allows equipment to be purchased and installed as it is needed for scalability.

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

VISM and VISM-PR Card Features

Figure 1-5 shows a simplified diagram of the VISM architecture and its major components.

Figure 1-5 VISM Card Block Diagram

Secondary CPU

(Datamover)

OC-3 to ATM Packet Network

31429

The card is broadly divided into a TDM side and an ATM side. The T1/E1 framers, the array of DSPs, and the HDLC processor support the TDM side. The ATM adaptation layer (AAL) and the segmentation and reassembly (SAR) sections support the ATM side.

VISM is under the control of two independent processors. The main processor performs the control tasks???configuration, call setup and teardown, and management. The second processor, the datamover, handles the moving and processing of the voice and voiceband data traffic through the system.

The VISM card itself contains no ports for the connection of management stations. Workstations, PCs, or terminals used to manage VISM must be attached via the PXM card which provides both serial EIA/TIA-232 and Ethernet ports.

VISM and VISM-PR Card Features

VISM cards process high-density digital voice circuits and provide dynamic compression, echo cancellation, dejittering, silence suppression, and packetization. The VISM card uses the following features which you can configure:

???Eight standard T1 or E1 interfaces with the following line coding:

???Bipolar 8-zero substitution (B8ZS)???for T1

???Alternate mark inversion (AMI)???for T1

???High density bipolar 3 (HDB3)???for E1

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

VISM and VISM-PR Card Features

???Voice over ATM (VoATM) using AAL2 cells???No Logical Link Control/Subnetwork Access Protocol (LLC/SNAP) encapsulation.

Note Multiplexing is not supported for AAL2 SVCs.

???VoIP using AAL5 cells to RFC 1889.

???Extended Superframe (ESF) framing with or without cyclic redundancy check (CRC).

???Pulse code modulation (PCM) A/Mu law codecs.

???Programmable 24, 32, 48, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128 ms tail delay near end ECAN.

???Voice compression with the following standards:

???G.711

???G.726-16k

???G.726-24k

???G.726-32k

???G.726-40k

???G.729a

???G.729ab

???G.723.1-H

???G.723.1a-H

???G.723.1-L

???G.723.1a-L

Note The G.723.1 codecs are not supported in combination with the VISM card. The G.723.1 codecs are supported with the VISM-PR card.

???Nx64 clear channel (N = 1 only) support.

???Voice activity detection (VAD) and comfort noise generation (CNG) using variable threshold energy (Cisco proprietary).

???Call agent Simple Gateway Control Protocol (SGCP) Version 1.0, 1.1, 1.5, SGCP 1.1+, 1.5, and Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) 0.1 and 1.0.

???Backhauling channel associated signaling (CAS) signaling to a call agent using xGCP (backhauling can be accomplished with any supported SGCP and MGCP protocol).

???Backhauling Primary Rate Interface (PRI) signaling via Reliable User Datagram Protocol (RUDP) to a call agent.

???Common channel signaling (CCS) transport across an AAL5 trunk.

???Fax and modem VoIP bearer transmissions.

???Dual (redundant) virtual circuits across the packet network.

???Full continuity testing (COT). Supports origination and terminating loopback and transponder COT between VISM and the central office on the TDM side.

???Loop timing, which can be used as the master clock for the entire MGX 8000 Series platform and local clock.

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

VISM and VISM-PR Card Features

???Line loopback (DS1) toward the TDM lines.

???Channel loopback (DS0) toward both the TDM lines and the ATM network.

???Transmission and reception of bit error rate tester (BERT) signals over loopbacked lines.

???Redundant alarm indication signal (RAI) and alarm indication signal (AIS) alarms.

???Extracting a DS0 CCS channel and directing it to the TDM signaling function.

???1:N cold redundancy using subrate multiplexing (SRM)-3T3 (bulk mode support for T1 lines only) and SRM-E (for OC3) capabilities. Calls do not persist during switchover.

???Graceful shutdown of ongoing voice calls when the VISM is taken out of service for maintenance or other reasons. Forced shutdown is also supported.

Caution A forced shutdown of the VISM or VISM-PR card may result in dropped calls.

Redundancy and Bulk Distribution

Redundancy for VISM cards with or without bulk distribution can be provided through the Service Redundancy Module (SRM) and SRM-E. Redundancy for VISM is also provided by Media Gateway Controller (MGC) redundancy groups. VISM redundancy is cold redundancy in which ongoing calls do not persist during switchover.

Note SRM-E is supported with PXM1 and PXM1E cards only.

Redundancy with bulk distribution requires a spare VISM card to be installed. The system uses the three T3 ports of the SRM back card instead of the normal T1 lines on the VISM back cards. VISM cards in bulk distribution mode do not require back cards.

The TDM voice data transmitted or received over the T3 ports are distributed to the VISM card as if they had been received over VISM T1 back card ports in the normal manner. This feature reduces the number of physical lines required to support VISM, but requires external equipment to multiplex and demultiplex the T1 data onto the T3 lines.

With or without bulk distribution, redundancy allows for the spare VISM card to automatically take over the functions of a failed VISM card. When the failed card is repaired, switching back to the repaired card is not automatic. You must manually change the repaired card back to the active state with the command line interface. See Chapter 4, ???Configuring VISM Features.???

Note 1:1 redundancy using Y-cables is not supported by VISM.

Redundancy can also be configured at the ATM permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) level. Two separate PVCs can be set up, each using a different PXM physical port and each routed to a separate router. Configure one PVC as active and the other as standby. Both PVCs are monitored by heartbeat OAM F5 loopback cells every 200 ms. If three consecutive OAM cells are lost, the PVC fails, and only the remaining PVC is active. A PVC will recover automatically when five consecutive OAM cells are received while the PVC remains in standby mode (no automatic fallback to active state is provided).

Control and bearer PVCs can be set up with a redundant PVC.

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

VISM and VISM-PR Card Features

Operating Modes

The VISM/VISM-PR card performs in the following operating modes:

???Voice over IP (VoIP) switching/trunking

???Switched AAL1 switched virtual circuits (SVCs)

???Switched AAL2 SVC

???Switched AAL2 PVC???this mode is not supported in VISM Release 3.0

???AAL2 trunking

???VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC

The VISM/VISM-PR card, in order to support the operating modes, supports connections to three major interfaces:

???Voice TDM network

???ATM network

???Call agent???signaling (either CAS or CCS but not both) and call control

In VoIP switching, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL1 SVC, and AAL2 SVC modes, all three of these interfaces are always present and active. In AAL2 trunking mode, the interface to the call agent interface is not present and the only active interfaces are to the TDM network and the ATM network.

The operating modes, combined with features you configure, are used by VISM cards in a wide variety of telephony applications. For example:

???Provide many of the functions of a tandem (Class 4) switch. VISM can be used to replace, or partially offload, a Tandem switch by directing calls over a packet network rather than the conventional voice TDM network.

???Concentrate voice and data user services onto a single broadband circuit for transmission over the packet network. In this application, VISM performs as a front end to a voice gateway.

???The VISM/MGX combination is used to concentrate voice (and fax/modem voiceband data) user services over a preprovisioned AAL2 trunk. VISM passes bearer and signaling data across a packet network and does not perform call setup and teardown functions.

VoIP Switching and Switched AAL2 PVC Operating Modes

In VoIP switching mode and switched AAL2 PVC mode, VISM operates under the control of a call agent to set up and tear down calls. When a call is set up, VISM transports voice payloads over an ATM network to the called station destination. VISM performs either as a voice gateway or as a multiservice access front end to a voice gateway.

Note This document refers to the device that provides the interface between VISM and the telephone Signaling System 7 (SS7) as a call agent. Other terms that describe the same device are Virtual Switch Controller, Media Gateway Controller, and Gatekeeper.

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

VISM and VISM-PR Card Features

Figure 1-6 shows the major functional blocks and interfaces for the VoIP switching and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

Figure 1-6 VISM Block Diagram for VoIP Switching and Switched AAL2 PVC Operating Modes

The CAS signaling path on the TDM side is embedded in the voice stream but is separated at the bearer processing function. The CAS signaling then joins the CCS signaling path for CAS/CCS processing and is backhauled to the call agent. The path between the call agent and bearer processing, via a connection handling function, is for call setup and teardown.

Voice TDM Network Interface

The voice payload path is shown as a solid line along the bottom of Figure 1-6. All external TDM streams arrive and depart on the T1/E1 lines. Depending on the application, these streams consist of voice bearer channels (with or without CAS signaling) and separate CCS channels (if CCS signaling is used). The TDM line handling function provides the physical layer interface, which includes framing, line codes, clocking, loopbacks, physical alarms, etc. Bearer channels, including CAS, are sent to the bearer processing function. CCS channels are sent to the CAS/CCS processing function.

Further processing of the bearer channels is performed by the DSPs. This processing provides ECAN, compression, A/Mu law conversion, silence suppression, and fax/modem handling. If CAS signaling is present, signaling bits are extracted at the DSP stage and sent to the CAS/CCS processing function.

ATM Network Interface

The ATM processing function receives the processed DS0 voice streams and prepares them for transport over a packet network. The voice streams are divided into specific sample periods (for example, 5 ms or 10 ms) and formatted into service specific convergence sublayer (SSCS) packets appropriate for the method of transport over the ATM network. The available transport methods are VoIP (using AAL5) and voice over AAL2. Processing of the ATM packets further segments the voice payload into ATM cells for transport over the network using a SONET port on the PXM card.

Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

VISM and VISM-PR Card Features

Call Agent Interface

The call agent interface consists of CAS signaling or CCS signaling and call control. The path between the call agent and bearer processing, via a connection handling function, is for call setup and teardown.

The CAS signaling path on the TDM side is embedded in the voice stream (bearer DS0s) and is separated at the bearer processing function. The CAS signaling (robbed bits, digits, and tones) is passed to the CAS/CCS processing function where it is passed (backhauled) to the call agent under the control of the call agent. The mechanism for communicating between VISM and the call agent is a gateway control protocol:

???MGCP

???SGCP

???SRCP

The separate CCS signaling path channels are passed to the CAS/CCS processing function and backhauled to the call agent. The CCS signaling is transported as ISDN Q.931 messages both on the TDM side and on the call agent side. On the TDM side, the messages are carried in the Q.921 layer protocol (which terminates at the VISM card). On the call agent side, communication with the call agent consists of Q.931 messages encapsulated in RUDP/UDP/IP packets. The Q.931 connection is terminated at the call agent and not at the VISM card.

The call control path uses MGCP, SGCP, and SRCP for call setup and teardown. Because signaling and call control are so intertwined, both call control and CAS use the same path and protocol for the VISM card to call agent communications.

AAL2 Trunking Operating Mode

In the AAL2 trunking operating mode, the VISM card serves as an access to one or more trunks to preprovisioned locations. VISM may be used at both ends of the trunk, or at one end with a compatible device at the other. In AAL2 trunking mode, VISM plays no part in call setup and teardown. Other network elements handle call control while VISM merely handles voice transport over the trunks. Figure 1-7 shows the major functional blocks for the AAL2 trunking operating mode.

The AAL2 trunking mode is less complex than the VoIP switching and AAL2 PVC switched modes because there is no call control involved???and no need for a call agent.

Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

VISM and VISM-PR Card Features

The voice bearer path is treated in the same manner as in the VoIP switching and AAL2 PVC modes, except that only preprovisioned AAL2 PVCs are available for transport of voice over the trunks. The CAS signaling data is transported over the ATM network in the same AAL2 trunk as Type 3 messages. The CCS signaling data is transported over the ATM network in a separate AAL5 PVC.

VoIP Trunking Operating Mode

The Voice over IP (VoIP) trunking feature allows the VISM to connect to the PBX, or central office digital systems, using T1/E1 digital interfaces and converts the TDM bit stream into RTP packets, after ECAN and compression, and transports it over the IP network.

No call agent is required for setting up and tearing down calls. You must configure the DS0 circuits. The connection between VISM and the first router will be ATM after which it will be IP only. VISM and the router can have one or multiple PVCs to transport the data. You have the option to configure PVC for bearer or control. If the PVC is configured as bearer and no control PVC exists, then PRI signal traffic and bearer traffic will go through this PVC. If you configure separate PVCs for control and bearer, PRI signaling will go through control traffic only. You can modify some of the connection parameters after it is added.

CAS is transported to the far end using a Cisco proprietary format (not NSEs). PRI is transported over RUDP to the far end once the trunk is provisioned between the originating and terminating VISM.

PRI transport is handled in a way identical to PRI backhaul except that the PRI traffic is sent to remote gateway instead of a call agent. You can configure one line for PRI trunking and another line for PRI backhauling.

You must provision the LAPD trunk when using this feature. You must configure a line number, remote gateway IP address, local UDP port, and remote gateway UDP port, and then open a trunk. You must then configure the D-channel as a trunk or backhaul:

???To configure the D channel as trunk, use the addlapdtrunk command prior to the addlapd command. If the addlapd command has been previously executed for that line, the command is rejected.

Note Two D channels on one line are not supported.

???To configure the D channel as backhaul, use the addses command prior to the addlapd command. If you do not configure either trunk or session, the addlapd command is rejected.

AAL1/AAL2 SVC Operating Mode

Release 3.0(0) supports the AAL1 and AAL2 switched virtual circuit (SVC) operating modes for VISM-PR cards. VoAAL1 SVC is supported with the G.711 codec and clear channel.

Note VAD is not supported in combination with AAL1 SVCs. CAS is not supported in combination with SVCs.

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

Installing VISM Hardware and Software

VoAAL2 SVC is supported with the G.711, G.726, G.729a, and G.729ab codecs and profiles 1, 2, 3, 7, 8, 100, 101, 110, and 200.

Note The AAL1/AAL2 SVC operating modes require you to use a PXM1E or PXM45 in your MGX 8000 Series switch chassis.

Installing VISM Hardware and Software

You can install VISM cards in the following configurations:

???Install a VISM front card and a back card as a pair. The front and back cards must occupy the same slot.

???Install a VISM front card with no back card. The MGX 8000 Series bulk distribution feature allows this configuration. Access to and from the TDM lines is performed by the Service Resource Module (SRM) and the MGX 8000 Series distribution bus.

Note VISM cards in bulk distribution mode do not require back cards.

??? Install a VISM front card as a redundant card with a redundant back card in the same slot.

Note VISM T1 front cards require T1 back cards and E1 front cards require E1 back cards. Ensure that your configuration meets this requirement.

In each of these configurations, connections to the packet network are made through the MGX 8000 Series cellbus and an OC-3 port located on the MGX 8000 Series PXM card. Refer to the ???VISM and VISM-PR Card Physical Characteristics??? section on page 1-5 for more information on front and back cards.

Installing VISM Cards in MGX 8000 Series Chassis

VISM front and back cards can be installed in the following MGX 8000 Series platforms with these basic guidelines:

???Cisco MGX 8850 Release 1???Up to 24 slots can be used for VISM cards.

???Cisco MGX 8250???Up to 24 slots can be used for VISM cards.

???Cisco MGX 8230???Up to eight slots can be used for VISM cards.

The VISM card can be used with the Processor Module-1 (PXM1) card.

Installing VISM-PR Cards in MGX 8000 Series Chassis

VISM-PR front and back cards can be installed in the following MGX 8000 Series platforms with these basic guidelines:

???MGX 8250 and MGX 8850???Up to 24 slots can be used for VISM-PR cards.

???MGX 8230???Up to 8 slots can be used for VISM-PR cards.

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

Installing VISM Hardware and Software

The VISM-PR card can be used with the following Processor Module cards:

???PXM1

???PXM1E

???PXM45

You must install an additional fan tray spacer at the bottom of your MGX 8000 Series switch chassis directly above the intake plenum if you are using the VISM-PR card in combination with the PXM45 card. Refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 Hardware Installation Guide, Release 3 for step-by-step instructions to install a fan tray.

MGX 8850 and MGX 8250 Chassis

VISM and VISM-PR card installation in a Cisco MGX 8850 or MGX 8250 platform consists of installing one front card and one back card (if not using the bulk distribution feature) in either the upper or lower shelf of the chassis. You can use slots 1 to 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22, and 25 to 30 to install VISM cards (see Figure 1-8).

Figure 1-8 Available Chassis Slots for VISM Cards in the MGX 8850 and MGX 8250???Front View

Note If you use all the available slots, you can configure the MGX 8850 and MGX 8250 with up to 24 VISM cards. However, the two lower shelf cellbuses can each sustain a bandwidth of one OC-3/STM-1 link. This bandwidth limits the number of E1 ports on the lower shelf, when using the G.711 codec, to 78, which limits the number of VISM cards to 10.

Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

Installing VISM Hardware and Software

MGX 8230 Chassis

VISM card installation in a Cisco MGX 8230 platform consists of installing one front card and one back card (if not using the bulk distribution feature) in either a left or right shelf slot. You can use slots 3 to 6, and 10 to 13 to install VISM cards (see Figure 1-9). If you use all the available slots, you can configure the MGX 8230 with up to eight VISM cards.

Figure 1-9 Available Chassis Slots for VISM Cards in the Cisco MGX 8230???Front View

Installing VISM and VISM-PR Front and Back Cards

This section describes the following hardware installation procedures:

1.Installing a VISM or VISM-PR Front Card

2.Installing a VISM Back Card

3.Connecting Cables to Cards

Installing a VISM or VISM-PR Front Card

Complete the following instructions to install a VISM or VISM-PR front card:

Step 1 Position the rear card guides over the appropriate slot in the chassis.

Step 2 Gently slide the card all the way into the slot and press the insertion/extractor lever until it snaps into the vertical (MGX 8250 or MGX 8850) or horizontal (MGX 8230) position.

Caution The card should slide in and out with only slight friction on the EMI gaskets on the adjacent board. Do not use force. Investigate any binding.

Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

Installing VISM Hardware and Software

Installing a VISM Back Card

Complete the following instructions to install a VISM back card:

Step 1 Ensure that the two extractor levers are at the ???in??? position.

When you insert the card into the slot, the levers should be vertical or horizontal along the line of the back card.

Step 2 Position the rear card guides over the appropriate slot in the chassis.

Step 3 Gently slide the card all the way into the slot.

Step 4 Tighten the two captive screws on the back card???s faceplate.

Step 5 Tighten the upper and lower screws to prevent misalignment of the card.

Note Do not overtighten the screws. Tighten them only enough to secure the card.

Connecting Cables to Cards

After you install the VISM front and back cards, connect the T1 or E1 cables to the RJ-48 or SMB connectors on the back cards. The T1 and E1 cables connect the eight ports on the back cards to the voice T1 or E1 lines. The T1 lines use RJ-48 connectors. The E1 lines use either RJ-48 or SMB connectors.

Note In all text references to cables, ???transmit??? refers to a cable used for data moving away from the VISM card, and ???receive??? refers to a cable used for data moving toward the VISM card.

Cabling for RJ-48 Connectors on T1 and E1 Ports

For T1 and E1 ports that connect through an RJ-48 connector, each connector has:

???Transmit TIP (TTIP) pin

???Transmit RING (TRNG) pin

???Receive TIP (RTIP) pin

???Receive RING (RRNG) pin

???Two pins for shielded ground

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

Installing VISM Hardware and Software

The connector wiring is shown in Figure 1-10.

Figure 1-10 RJ-48 PIN Connector

RTIP

OUT

RRNG

OUT

11763

ground/shield

Cabling for SMB Connectors on E1 Ports

When you use the E1 VISM back card with SMB cables, the E1 trunk cables connect the customer DSX-1 cross-connect point or E1 channel service unit (CSU) to the node using 75-ohm coaxial cable fitted with SMB connectors.

Removing VISM and VISM-PR Front and Back Cards

This section describes the following hardware installation procedures:

???Removing a VISM or VISM-PR Front Card

???Removing a VISM Back Card

Removing a VISM or VISM-PR Front Card

Step 1 Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver into the slot in the insertion/extractor lever and press until the latch springs open, to approximately 10??.

Step 2 Continue to lift the insertion/extractor lever to disconnect the connector.

Step 3 Gently pull the card out of the chassis.

Removing a VISM Back Card

Step 1 Remove any cables connected to the back card.

Step 2 Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to unscrew the two retaining screws in the back card???s faceplate.

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

Installing VISM Hardware and Software

Step 3 Pull both of the extractor levers out to the horizontal position.

This action starts the removal of the card.

Step 4 Gently pull the card out of the chassis.

Applying Power to the VISM Card

You apply power to a VISM card by installing it in an already running MGX 8000 Series platform, or by applying power to a chassis that has a previously installed VISM card. When power is applied, the VISM card performs extensive testing and initialization functions. If the card has already been configured, the initialization downloads the configuration data from the disk on the PXM. This process takes approximately two minutes, during which the LED indicator blinks. When the Active LED becomes solid green, the card is in the Active state and is ready to be configured (if necessary) and able to process data.

Installing VISM Software Upgrades

VISM Release 3.0 provides a graceful upgrade procedure from Release 1.5 and higher. The existing VISM configuration is preserved throughout the upgrade procedure, provided that the following conditions are met:

???The Cisco MGX 8000 Series platform must be configured with at least two VISM cards in a redundant configuration. Refer to the add redundancy, addred, command in the Cisco MGX 8850, MGX 8250, and MGX 8230 command reference guides for details.

???The VISM cards must be running VISM 2.0 and be configured to the desired configuration.

???The VISM Release 3.0 software must have been already downloaded to the Cisco MGX shelf. Refer to Release Notes for Cisco Voice Interworking Services Module Release 3.0(0) for details.

???Cisco recommends an upgrade in the backup boot to version 3.0.

Complete the following steps to upgrade the VISM software. In the following procedure, old-rev refers to the firmware before the upgrade (2.0) and new-rev refers to the firmware after the upgrade (3.0).

Note If the VISM card you are upgrading is part of a nonredundant configuration, complete Step 1 to Step 4 only.

Step 1 Log in to the active PXM card (slot 7 or 8).

Step 2 Save the existing configuration as a contingency plan by entering:

savesmcnf <SM slot#>

where:

SM slot# is the slot number of the active VISM card.

This command saves the existing configuration to the C:\CNF directory. This file can be used during the downgrade procedure, if necessary.

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

Installing VISM Hardware and Software

Step 3 Execute the PXM install command for the backup boot image:

install bt sm <SM slot#> <new bb rev>

where:

SM slot# is the slot number of the active card, and new bb rev is the version number of the new backup boot image.

This command downloads the backup boot image to the flash in the VISM card slot you specified. The new backup boot image takes effect upon the next card reset.

Step 4 Execute the PXM install command:

install sm <SM slot#> <new-rev>

where:

SM slot# is the slot number of the VISM card that was active before the upgrade process started, and new-rev is the file name of the new firmware (for example, vism_8t1e1_002.001.000.000.fw).

This command causes the standby VISM card to reset and be placed in the hold state, running the new-rev firmware. The active VISM card is unaffected by this command. At this point the primary firmware is still the old-rev and the secondary firmware is new-rev.

Step 5 Execute the PXM newrev command:

newrev sm <SM slot#> <new-rev>

where:

SM slot# is the slot number of the VISM card that was active before the upgrade process started, and new-rev is the filename of the new firmware.

This command causes the standby VISM card to become the active VISM card running the new-rev firmware. The previously active VISM card is placed in the hold state, becoming the new standby VISM card, and is still running the old-rev firmware. The primary and secondary firmware switches with the new-rev becoming the primary firmware.

Step 6 Execute the PXM commit command:

commit sm <SMslot#> <new-rev>

where:

SM slot# is the slot number of the new standby VISM card and new-rev is the filename of the new firmware.

This command causes both VISM cards to run the new-rev firmware. After a short time, the cards switch automatically so that the originally active VISM card becomes the active card and the originally standby VISM card becomes the standby card. The two VISM cards are now back to their original condition except that both cards are now running the new-rev firmware.

Step 7 Log in to the active VISM card and use the display commands (dspendpts, dspcasvar, etc.) to confirm that the configuration has been preserved through the upgrade process.

Cisco recommends that you further verify the configuration by making some minor modifications to the configuration, checking that the changes have been executed correctly, and then changing the configuration back again.

See Appendix B, ???VISM and VISM-PR???3.0 Specifications??? for more information about the VISM and VISM-PR card specifications.

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

Software Upgrades

Software Upgrades

VISM/VISM-PR Release 3.0 provides a graceful upgrade procedure for the following releases:.

???From VISM 1.5 to VISM 3.0

???From VISM 2.1 to VISM 3.0

???From VISM 2.2 to VISM 3.0

Caution Installing VISM software upgrades from VISM Release 2.2 with CALEA to VISM Release 3.0 without CALEA is not graceful.

Prerequisites

To ensure that the VISM/VISM-PR configuration is preserved throughout the upgrade procedure, you must complete the prerequisites listed in this section.

Before starting the graceful upgrade procedure, complete the following prerequisites:

???Configure your MGX 8000 Series shelf with at least two VISM cards in a redundant configuration.

For more information on adding redundancy, refer to the add redundancy, addred, command in the Cisco MGX 8250, Cisco MGX 8230, and Cisco MGX 8850 PXM1-based Command Reference documentation and the Cisco MGX 8830 and MGX 8850 PXM1E/ PXM45-based Command Reference documentation.

???Ensure that the VISM/VISM-PR cards are running at least Release 2.1.

???Download software Release 3.0 for VISM/VISM-PR to the MGX 8000 Series shelf.

???If you are using the CALEA feature, ensure that you have the version of VISM/VISM-PR software that supports CALEA.

VISM/VISM-PR Upgrades with PXM1

This section describes the procedures for upgrading VISM/VISM-PR software when the

VISM/VISM-PR is used with a PXM1 card.

Download VISM/VISM-PR Boot Code and Firmware to PXM1

To download the VISM/VISM-PR boot code and firmware to the PXM1 card, use TFTP.

Step 1 Log in to your TFTP server.

Step 2 Download the bootcode and firmware images from the Cisco website.

Step 3 Download the selected revision of service module boot code into the service module.

a.tftp <node_name or IP address>

b.bin

c.put <backup boot> POPEYE@SM_1_0.BT

d.quit

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

Software Upgrades

Step 4 Download the selected firmware file.

To upgrade all VISM cards, proceed to Step 4c. To upgrade an individual VISM card, proceed to Step 4d.

a.tftp <node_name or IP address>

b.bin

c.put <FW file> POPEYE@SM_1_0.FW quit

d.put <FW file> POPEYE@SM_1_<slot number of card to upgrade>.FW quit

Note Do not enter two put commands in the same TFTP session.

Step 5 Proceed to the ???Upgrade VISM/VISM-PR Firmware with PXM1 Card??? section on page 1-21 to install the download.

Upgrade VISM/VISM-PR Firmware with PXM1 Card

Software Release 3.0 is for VISM and VISM-PR cards. Ensure that the VISM and VISM-PR cards have the minimum boot code version of vism_8t1e1_VI8_BT_3.1.00.fw.

The following versions of VISM software Release 3.0 are available:

???003.000.000.000???without CALEA

???003.050.000.000???with CALEA

In this procedure the following conditions apply:

???If two VISM or VISM-PR cards are part of a redundancy group, initially the primary card is in the active state, and the secondary card is in the standby state.

???Old-rev refers to the firmware, Release 2.2 and prior.

???New-rev refers to the firmware after the upgrade, Release 3.0.

Perform the firmware upgrade on the VISM or VISM-PR cards. Do not remove the VISM cards and replace them with VISM-PR cards at this time.

Step 1 Log in to the active PXM1 card (slot 7 or 8).

Step 2 Save the existing configuration as a contingency plan by entering:

savesmcnf <SM slot#>

This command saves the existing configuration in the C:CNF directory. This file can be used during the downgrade procedure, if necessary.

Step 3 Execute the PXM install command:

install sm <SM slot#> <new-rev>

where:

SM slot# is the slot number of the primary VISM or VISM-PR card and new-rev is the file name of the new firmware (for example, vism_8t1e1_003.000.000.000.fw).

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

Software Upgrades

This command causes the secondary VISM or VISM-PR card to reset and come up in the standby state, running the new-rev firmware. The primary VISM or VISM-PR card is unaffected by this command.

Step 4 Execute the PXM newrev command:

newrev sm <SM slot#> <new-rev>

where:

SM slot# is the slot number of the primary VISM or VISM-PR card and new-rev is the filename of the new firmware.

This command causes the primary VISM or VISM-PR card to reset and the secondary VISM or VISM-PR card to become active and running the new-rev firmware.

Step 5 Execute the PXM commit command:

commit sm <SM slot#> <new-rev>

where:

SM slot# is the slot number of the primary VISM or VISM-PR card and new-rev is the filename of the new firmware.

The two VISM or VISM-PR cards are now back to their original condition except that both cards are now running the new-rev firmware.

Step 6 Log in to the active VISM or VISM-PR card and use the display commands (for example, dspendpts, dspcasvar, and so forth) to confirm that the configuration has been preserved through the upgrade process.

Note For more than one primary VISM or VISM-PR card in a redundancy group, ensure that the secondary card is in the standby state and repeat Step 4 and Step 5 for each VISM card in the redundancy group.

It is also recommended that you perform the following verifications:

???Make minor modifications to the configuration.

???Check that the changes have been executed correctly.

???Change the configuration back again.

Note If the VISM or VISM-PR card is not part of a redundancy group, complete Step 1 to Step 3.

For more information about the VISM and VISM-PR card specifications, see ???VISM and

VISM-PR???3.0 Specifications??? section on page B-1.

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

Software Upgrades

Boot Code Upgrade Procedure with PXM1 Cards

Complete the following steps to upgrade the new backup boot code when you are using PXM1 cards in your MGX 8230, MGX 8250, and MGX 8850 chassis:

Note This procedure re-programs the VISM boot code for previous VISMs using the VISM runtime image version 1.0 to 2.0.

Step 1 Telnet to MGX shelf and cc to the VISM card.

Note VISM must be in the active state in order to update the VISM boot code.

Step 2 Access the server where the VISM boot code resides and TFTP the VISM boot code to the VISM card:

a.Type tftp <IP address of the MGX shelf>

b.Type bin at the tftp prompt.

Caution Ensure that you perform Step 2b. If you to not perform Step 2b. the boot code is corrupted and not recoverable.

c. Type install [bt] [sm <slot>] <version> at the PXM prompt.

Caution Do not touch the VISM card until the status comes back ('Sent xxx bytes in yyy seconds'). Failure to follow this recommendation corrupts the boot code, which cannot be recovered.

When the boot code is being written to PROM, you will see comments displayed at the VISM prompt. This behavior is normal and expected.

Step 3 Use the resetcd command for VISM from the PXM card for the latest boot take effect.

Step 4 Type the version command to verify the correct boot code.

Note Step 4 is optional.

You have completed upgrading the new VISM backup boot code.

VISM-PR Upgrades with PXM1E and PXM45

This section describes the procedures for upgrading VISM-PR software when the VISM-PR is used with a PXM1E or PXM45 card.

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

Software Upgrades

Download VISM-PR Boot Code and Firmware to PXM1E and PXM45

To download the VISM-PR boot code and firmware to the PXM1E or PXM45 card, use FTP.

Step 1 Access the image on the Cisco Web site.

Step 2 To download the image, enter the ftp command. ftp node-ip

where node-ip is the IP address of the node to which you want to download the image.

Step 3 Enter your user name and password.

Step 4 Enter bin.

Step 5 Access the appropriate directory.

cd C:FW

Step 6 Download the image to your C:FW directory. put image-version

where image-version is the downloaded image from Step 1.

Step 7 To exit the download procedure, enter bye.

Upgrade VISM-PR Firmware with PXM1E and PXM45 Cards

Ensure that the VISM-PR cards have the minimum boot code version of vism_8t1e1_VI8_BT_3.1.00.fw. The following versions of VISM-PR software Release 3.0 are available:

???003.000.000.000???without CALEA

???003.050.000.000???with CALEA

Perform the firmware upgrade on the VISM-PR cards.

Step 1 Log in to the active PXM1E or PXM45 card.

Step 2 Ensure that the card is in the redundant mode, where the active card is the primary card.

Step 3 To save the existing configuration as a contingency plan, enter the saveallcnf command.

Step 4 To load the new software, enter the loadrev command. loadrev sm-primary-slot-num new-rev

where sm-primary-slot-num is the slot number of the VISM-PR card in which you want to install the new software; and new-rev is the new firmware version number for the VISM-PR software.

Caution Temporary traffic loss occurs.

Step 5 To execute the download, enter the runrev command. runrev sm-primary-slot-num new-rev

Caution Temporary traffic loss occurs.

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

Software Upgrades

Step 6 To commit the new download to the VISM-PR card, enter the commitrev command.

commitrev sm-primary-slot-num new-rev

You have completed the steps. Proceed to the Boot Code Upgrade Procedure with PXM1E and PXM45 Cards, page 1-25.

Boot Code Upgrade Procedure with PXM1E and PXM45 Cards

Complete the following steps to upgrade the new backup boot code when you are using PXM1E or PXM45 cards in your MGX 8000 Series chassis:

Step 1 Complete the steps in the VISM-PR Upgrades with PXM1E and PXM45, page 1-23 section.

Step 2 Log in to the PXM1E or PXM45 card.

Step 3 Use the burnboot sm-primary-slot-num new-rev command, where sm-primary-slot-num is the slot number of the VISM-PR card you want to upgrade and new-rev is the firmware version number of the new VISM software, to upgrade the VISM-PR boot code.

The VISM-PR card automatically resets and becomes active with the latest boot code image. You have completed the boot code upgrade procedure.

VISM/VISM-PR Downgrade Procedure

Use this procedure to downgrade VISM software from software Release 3.0 to an earlier VISM release. By following the downgrade procedure described here, the configurations are retained after the downgrade.

Note The configurations that existed with old-rev firmware should have been saved earlier. You cannot downgrade from VISM-PR to VISM.

Complete the following steps to downgrade the VISM software from software Release 3.0 for

VISM/VISM-PR to Release 2.2, 2.1, 2.0, or 1.5:

Step 1 If the VISM card is in a redundancy group, remove the redundancy.

delred <SM slot#>

Step 2 Download the old-rev firmware onto the MGX shelf.

Step 3 Execute the PXM clrsmcnf command:

clrsmcnf <SM slot#>

where:

SM slot# is the slot number of the VISM card to be downgraded.

The VISM card resets on executing this command. Wait for the card to come active.

Chapter 1 Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards

Software Upgrades

Step 4 Execute the PXM restoresmcnf command:

restoresmcnf -f <filename> -s <SM slot#>

where:

The filename is the name of the old configuration file that was saved while the old-rev firmware was running. The file can be found in the C:CNF directory on the MGX shelf.

The SM slot# is the slot number of the VISM card to be downgraded.

The VISM card resets again. When the card becomes active, it has the old-rev firmware running with the old configuration.

Step 5 Reconfigure redundancy group, if required.

VISM to VISM-PR Hardware Upgrade

Complete the following steps to upgrade your system from VISM cards to VISM-PR cards.

Caution You must install the redundant (standby) VISM-PR card first. Failure to follow this recommendation results in traffic loss. In addition, do not remove an active VISM card from your chassis. Ensure that you configure an active VISM card to the standby state before you remove it and replace it with a VISM-PR card.

Step 1 Remove the redundant (standby) VISM card from your chassis.

Step 2 Install a VISM-PR card in the slot you removed the VISM card from in Step 1.

Step 3 Administratively configure the VISM-PR card you installed in Step 2 as primary (active).

Step 4 Remove the now redundant VISM card from your chassis.

Step 5 Install a VISM-PR card in the slot you removed the VISM card from in Step 4.

Step 6 Log in to the redundant (secondary) VISM-PR card and execute the dspcd command. Verify that the output from the dspcd command lists the card type under FunctionModuleType as a VISM-PR card. If the card type still indicates the VISM card, execute the resetcd slot-num command from the PXM and repeat the dspcd command to insure that the correct card type is shown.

Step 7 Log in to the active VISM-PR card and execute the dspcd command. Verify that the output from the dspcd command lists the card type under FunctionModuleType as a VISM-PR card. If the card type still indicates the VISM card, execute the resetcd slot-num command from the PXM and repeat the dspcd command to insure that the correct card type is shown.

Step 8 If you have no other VISM cards in your chassis, you have completed the hardware upgrade procedure; do not proceed to Step 9. If you have more VISM cards in your chassis, proceed to Step 9.

Step 9 Remove a standby VISM card from your chassis.

Step 10 Install a VISM-PR card in the slot you removed the VISM card from in Step 9.

Step 11 Repeat Step 9 and Step 10 to remove any remaining VISM cards in your chassis and replace them with VISM-PR cards.

Step 12 Repeat Step 6 and Step 7 on the remaining VISM-PR cards to insure the correct card type is shown.

C H A P T E R 2

Telephony Applications Using VISM

This chapter describes the VISM card and the ways it is used in telephony applications to transport traditional TDM voice traffic as digitized voice traffic over ATM networks. The following topics are discussed:

??????Tandem Switch Offloading??? section on page 2-1

??????Multiservice Access??? section on page 2-3

??????AAL2 Trunking??? section on page 2-3

Tandem Switch Offloading

Figure 2-1 shows VISM used to offload a Class 4 tandem switch by transporting a portion of the voice traffic across an ATM network instead of the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). VISM acts as the voice gateway in this application. Use VISM in the VoIP switching or switched AAL2 PVC operating mode to enable this application.

Figure 2-1 VISM Used in a Tandem Switch Offloading Application

MGX 8850 with VISM

Central

Office

SS7 Network

Call Agent

PSTN Network

Class 4

Switch

53233

Chapter 2 Telephony Applications Using VISM

Tandem Switch Offloading

When a call is initiated, the central office can use either the Class 4 switch or VISM to handle the call. When calls are passed to VISM, VISM backhauls the signaling to an SGCP or MGCP compliant call agent (such as the Cisco VSC 3000). The call agent at the near end manages the call setup in conjunction with the call agent at the far end and the calling and called VISM cards.

Note Although not shown in the diagram, an alternative method for handling CCS signaling is to transport it directly between the central office and the call agent with no VISM involvement. With this arrangement, there is no backhauling function performed in the VISM.

Each VISM card supports up to eight T1 or E1 lines for voice traffic. You can use an alternative method to connect the voice lines to the VISM cards???the TDM lines can be carried over a T3 line to an SRM card in the Cisco MGX shelf where the individual T1 lines are broken out and distributed to the VISM card internally. Refer to the Cisco MGX 8250, Release 1 and the Cisco MGX 8230 installation and configuration documents for details of the SRM card.

The VISM connects to the ATM network using either VoAAL2 or VoIP (UDP/IP packets encapsulated in AAL5 PVCs). VISM and the call agent communicate with each other and their activities are coordinated through either SGCP or MGCP.

For VoIP, when the call setup procedure is complete, each VISM has the IP address of the other VISM associated with the call. An end-to-end IP bearer circuit is established between the calling and called parties. At this point, the voice conversation can proceed.

By way of example, Figure 2-1 shows only one location for the VISM and call agent; in reality there is a similar arrangement for each tandem switch.

Figure 2-2 shows the connection from VISM to the call agent in greater detail.

53234

The VISM/MGX 8000 shelf is connected to the network by an OC-3 line which is used for both the voice payload and the communication with the call agent. A network edge router moves the voice traffic across the network to the called party???s VISM and routes call control information between the VISM and the call agent.

For reliability, two PVCs using separate physical links to two separate edge routers to the packet network can be established. If the primary circuit fails, transmission automatically switches to the secondary circuit. For enhanced reliability, the physical OC-3 links to the network can be protected by the SONET APS feature.

Using all the available slots, the Cisco MGX 8850 and the Cisco MGX 8250 can be configured with up to 24 VISM cards and the Cisco MGX 8230 can be configured with up to 8 VISM cards.

Chapter 2 Telephony Applications Using VISM

Multiservice Access

Each of the two lower shelf cellbuses can sustain a bandwidth of one OC-3/STM-1 link. This bandwidth limits the number of E1 ports on the lower shelf, when using the G.711 codec, to 78 (approximately 10 VISM cards).

Multiservice Access

A Cisco MGX 8000 series shelf, combined with one or more VISM cards, provides multiservice access between a customer???s TDM network and a voice gateway over a packet network. The voice gateway provides the interface to the telephone network.

When voice traffic is conveyed over a packet network using VISM and an MGX 8850???multiservice access???the MGX 8850 is located either at the customer???s premises (probably the case for large customer installations) or at the central office. Use VISM in the VoIP switching or switched AAL2 PVC operating mode to enable this application.

This application is very similar to the tandem switch offloading application, except that instead of performing as the voice gateway, VISM provides access to the voice gateway.

VISM operates in conjunction with an MGCP or SGCP compatible call agent via an edge router/switch on the packet network. Signaling is backhauled from VISM to the call agent through this connection. The call agent connects to the SS7 network and handles call setup and teardown across the packet network. The VISM connects to the ATM network and handles the voice payload between the TDM voice/data network and a voice gateway. For transmitting the voice payload to the network, VISM uses either VoIP transported in AAL5 ATM cells or VoAAL2.

Other data services (such as frame relay) can also be accommodated by configuring the MGX 8000 series shelf with the appropriate service modules (for example, FRSM) and using separate PVCs into the packet network.

AAL2 Trunking

A Cisco MGX 8000 series shelf, in combination with VISM cards, provides AAL2 trunking between a voice TDM network and voice gateways over a packet network. Use VISM in the AAL2 trunking operating mode to enable this application.

Figure 2-3 shows a trunk with a VISM-equipped MGX 8850 shelf at one end of a trunk (at the central office) and a Cisco 3810 Multiservice Access Concentrator and a Cisco MGX 8220 edge concentrator at the other end of the trunk (customer premises).

Figure 2-3 AAL2 Trunking???One End

PSTN

31438

Chapter 2 Telephony Applications Using VISM

AAL2 Trunking

Figure 2-4 shows a trunk with a VISM-equipped MGX 8850 shelf at each end of the trunk.

Figure 2-4 AAL2 Trunking???Two Ends

CPE

ATM PacketCentral Office

Network

T1 lines

PBX

PSTN

31439

Note Figure 2-4 shows one trunk; however, VISM can support up to 64 trunks in this arrangement.

In Figure 2-3 and Figure 2-4, the trunk is an AAL2 nonswitched ATM PVC that carries the voice traffic. The voice traffic is delivered to, or received from, the central office over short-haul T1 lines.

If CAS signaling is used, the signaling is transported across the trunk as AAL2 type 3 cells.

If CCS signaling is used, the signaling is delivered across the ATM network as AAL5 cells over separate PVCs. VISM supports up to eight AAL5 PVCs, one for each T1/E1 line.

Other data services (such as frame relay) can be accommodated by configuring Cisco 3810, Cisco MGX 8220, or Cisco MGX 8000 hardware with the appropriate service modules and using separate PVCs into the packet network. The packet network routes these other data services as required.

In AAL2 trunking mode, VISM is not involved with a call agent and the functions of call control. Multiple calls can be transported over a single PVC using the AAL2 channel identifier (CID) mechanism. DS1/DS0s are bound to virtual channel identifier (VCI)/CIDs so that voice traffic from any particular DS0 is automatically passed to its bound VCI/CID (and vice versa).

C H A P T E R 3

VISM Functional Description

The functions performed by VISM are described in the following sections:

??????TDM Line-Handling Function??? section on page 3-2

??????Bearer Processing Function??? section on page 3-3

??????Signaling Function??? section on page 3-5

??????ATM Voice Data Processing Function??? section on page 3-11

??????Call Control Function??? section on page 3-15

??????Embedded VISM Management Function??? section on page 3-19

Figure 3-1 shows the functional blocks of VISM. Items with single asterisks indicate VoIP switching and switched AAL2 PVC functions. Items with double asterisks indicate AAL2 trunking functions. Items without asterisks indicate VoIP switching, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking functions.

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

TDM Line-Handling Function

Figure 3-1 VISM Detailed Functional Blocks

User Inputs

(CLI, CWM, SNMP)

Embedded Management Functions

Signal backhaul xGCP (CAS), Q.931 (PRI) *

Call setup/ teardown xGCP *

SRCP *

To Call Agent *

Key:

*VoIP Switching and Switched AAL2 PVC modes only

**Trunking mode only

To ATM

Network

53235

TDM Line-Handling Function

The TDM line-handling function provides the physical layer interface to the T1/E1 lines and handles the following features:

???Framing

???Line codes

???Physical layer alarms and failures

???Clocking

???Loopbacks

???Distinguishes between bearer and CCS signaling channels

Outgoing traffic???in from the TDM network and out to the packet network???is processed by the T1/E1 framers where each DS0 is extracted from its DS1 stream and is routed by a DS0 switch to the appropriate function. Bearer DS0s are routed to the bearer processing function. CCS signaling DS0s are routed to the TDM signaling function.

Outgoing traffic???in from the packet network and out to the TDM network???is processed in the opposite manner. The DS0s received from the ATM side are inserted into their respective DS1s and transmitted over the appropriate line in the TDM network.

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

Bearer Processing Function

Bearer Processing Function

The bearer processing function processes raw bearer DS0 streams from the T1/E1 lines in preparation for packetization and segmentation and reassembly (SAR) processing on the ATM side. Most of the bearer processing is performed by the VISM daughter card???s DSPs.

The main processing categories are:

???Echo cancellation, voice compression, and A/Mu law conversion

???Voice activity detection and silence suppression

???Fax and modem handling

???Jitter control

???CAS handling

Echo Cancellation, Voice Compression, A/Mu Law Conversion

Bearer DS0 streams are received from the T1/E1 line function, and each is assigned to a DSP configured for echo cancellation (ECAN). You can configure the following ECAN parameters:

???Residual echo control

???Maximum tail in milliseconds (up to 128 ms)

???Fax and modem tone detection

If voice compression is required, the ECAN voice streams are assigned to a second DSP configured with the required codec. Available compression schemes are:

???G.711 64 kbps (A/Mu law, user configurable)

???G.726-16k

???G.726-24k

???G.726-32k

???G.726-40k

???G.729a

???G.729ab

???G.723.1-H

???G.723.1a-H

???G.723.1-L

???G.723.1a-L

VISM allows the use of codec templates in which the user selects a template instead of specifying each allowable codec individually. VISM supports the following codec templates:

???Template 1???Supports clear channel, G.711a, G.711u, G.729a, G.729ab, G.726-16k, G.726-24k, G.726-32k, and G.726-40k codecs.

???Template 2???Supports clear channel, G.711a, and G.711u codecs.

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

Bearer Processing Function

???Template 3???Supports G.711u, G.711a, G.726-16k, G.726-24k, G.726-32k, G.726-40k, G.729a, and G.729ab codecs, clear channel.

???Template 4???Supports G.711u, G.711a, G. 726-16k, G.726-24k, G.726-32k, G.726-40k, G.729a, G.729ab, G.723.1-H, G.723.1a-H, G.723.1-L, G.723.1a-L codecs and clear channel.

Within each template, you can specify a preference order for each codec. At call setup time, the codec to be used from the configured template is either specified by the call agent or negotiated between the calling and called VISM cards. If the codec is negotiated, the most preferred codec that both VISM cards can support is selected.

For each codec, VISM supports various packetization periods as described in Table 3-1.

Table 3-1 Supported Codecs and Packetization Periods

Voice Activity Detection and Silence Suppression

You can configure the VISM card DSPs to monitor the TDM voice stream for voice activity. If the voice activity detection (VAD) feature is enabled and no voice activity (silence) is detected for more than a specified period of time, typically 250 ms, the silent voice samples are suppressed. During periods of silence, parameters defining background noises transmit periodically. You can configure the remote VISM to use the background noise information to generate comfort noise at the called end while silence suppression is in operation.

Fax and Modem Tone Detection

You can configure the VISM card DSPs to detect the modem or fax tones on the data lines. For VoIP operating mode, the action is specified using command line interface (CLI) commands. Refer to Chapter 5, ???CLI Commands,??? for more information on CLI commands. For AAL2 connections, the action is specified in the AAL2 profile. Generally, when a modem or fax tone is detected, VAD and ECAN are turned off and codec is changed to the specified type (for example G.711 or clear channel).

Note If the codec is already set to clear channel, the DSP cannot detect any tones???fax and modem tones are not detected.

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

Signaling Function

Jitter Control

The VISM card uses voice buffers on the DSP to reduce jitter on outgoing voice streams. Jitter control operates in the following modes:

???Fixed???Allows you to configure a fixed buffer size in the range 0 to 100 ms. This mode is used when latency jitter is nearly constant. This is the default mode for G.711u/a and clear channel codecs, with a 100-ms buffer size.

???Adaptive???Allows you to configure a starting buffer size, but adapts the size of the buffer according to the jitter. Use this mode when latency jitter varies greatly. This is the default mode for all codecs other than G.711u/a and clear channel.

CAS Handling

In applications using CAS, you can configure the VISM card DSPs to monitor incoming traffic and extract the following CAS signaling information:

???ABCD bits

???Digits

???Tones

You can configure VISM to handle various CAS variations such as immediate start, wink start, ground start. The extracted CAS signaling information is sent to the TDM signaling function.

Signaling Function

All TDM signaling enters and exits VISM on the T1/E1 lines and is directed to the signaling function. CAS signaling information is received from the bearer processing function, described in the ???Bearer Processing Function??? section on page 3-3. CCS signaling information arrives directly from the TDM line handling function, described in the ???TDM Line-Handling Function??? section on page 3-2.

VISM depends on a combination of the following two features to determine how it handles signaling:

???Operating mode:

???VoIP switching/trunking

???Switched AAL2 PVC

???AAL2 trunking

???AAL1 SVC

???AAL2 SVC

???AAL1/VoIP (for TDM grooming)

???Signaling type:

???CAS

???CCS

Signaling enters from the T1/E1 lines and, depending upon the mode and the type of signaling, is processed for the correct protocol and directed to either the call agent or the ATM trunks (see Figure 3-2).

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

Signaling Function

Note You can configure the VISM card to support CCS signaling without VISM card involvement. In this configuration, a CCS channel is connected directly to the call agent that handles all necessary processing of signaling information.

CCS (AAL5 PVC)

72674

CAS signaling can be configured, in the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode, to send the signaling to the call agent or over an AAL2 PVC as in the AAL2 application.

CAS Processing in VoIP Switching and Switched AAL2 PVC Operating Mode

In the VoIP switching and switched AAL2 operating modes, CAS signaling is processed by the call agent using SGCP.

The call agent performs the following functions:

???Issues the SGCP Notification Request command to instruct VISM which CAS signals are to be reported to the call agent.

???Instructs VISM which CAS signals to send out the DS0.

The VISM card performs the following functions:

???Responds by sending acknowledge messages in return to call agent commands.

???Sends received CAS signals back to the call agent by using the SGCP Notify command.

???Interfaces with the DSP drivers, which perform the detection and generation of CAS signals.

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

Signaling Function

Figure 3-3 shows the messages involved in CAS processing with the VoIP switching and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

Figure 3-3 CAS Processing???Message Structure

A-B bits

Digits

T1/E1 Lines

DSPs

Events

DTMF, MF, Fax, & Modem tones Off/on hook

Hook flash Start/End MF string

Actions

Notify

Messages

Call

& Drivers

A-B bits

Digits

Tones

Tx A-B bits Report A-B bits Present dial string

Report tone generation Begin/End tone generation

Agent

Notification

Requests

53237

Figure 3-4 shows the local CAS processing call setup message sequences which occur between VISM, the call agent, and the telephone equipment on the DS0.

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

Signaling Function

Figure 3-4 CAS Signaling in Initiating and Terminating a Call

Notification Request, (off hook)

Ack

Ring to Ground

VISM

Start Timer

Loop still closed

Clear Timer

Notify Message, (off hook)

Dial tone

Digits

Notification Request (dial tone, digit collect, on-hook)

Notify Message (digit string)

Connect

CALL IN PROGRESS

On-hook

Notify Message, (on-hook)

Delete Connection

53238

Note Figure 3-4 shows only the local CAS aspects of call setup. The entire process of call setup involves many more messages between the local and remote call agents and the local and remote VISMs. Refer to the ???Call Control Function??? section on page 3-15 for more information.

The call processing for the VoIP switching and switched AAL2 operating modes is described in the following list:

1.The call agent requests VISM to look for an off-hook signal when the line is idle.

2.Upon receipt of an on-hook signal, VISM starts a timer and checks later to ensure that the line is still off-hook.

3.VISM notifies the call agent that the caller has gone off-hook (this timer mechanism is also used when processing on-hook/off-hook signaling to determine flash-hook events).

4.When the call agent is informed that the user is off-hook, the call agent instructs VISM to generate dial tone and to look for dialed digits.

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

Signaling Function

5.When the call agent receives the dialed number, it uses the dial plan to communicate with the remote call agent to set up the call.

6.The call is terminated when either the called or calling party goes on-hook.

CCS Processing in Switched AAL2 PVC Operating Mode

In the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode, CCS signaling can be configured to pass (backhaul) CCS signals between the user PBXs and the call agents.

You can configure T1 and E1 lines for CCS signaling. You must specify a particular DS0 as an Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) D channel to carry the Primary Rate Interface (PRI) signaling. Signaling from the private branch exchange (PBX) is received on the D channel as level 3 Q.931 messages encapsulated in the information field of level 2 Q.921 LAPD information frames.

The Q.921 link is terminated at the VISM, and on the call agent side, a Redundant User Datagram Protocol/User Datagram Protocol/Internet Protocol (RUDP/UDP/IP) connection is used to carry level 3 Q.931 signaling between VISM and the call agent. This link to the call agent flows through an intermediate router. From VISM to the router, the RUDP/UDP/IP packets are segmented and transported as AAL5 ATM cells.

The function of the VISM PRI/backhaul feature is to pass the Q.931 messages between the PBX and the call agent.

VISM handles all Q.921 frame types. For information type frames, the process is described in the following list:

1.VISM extracts the Q.931 frame.

2.VISM then places it in an RUDP datagram.

3.The RUDP datagram is encapsulated in UDP and IP packets (using the IP address and a specified port number of the destination call agent).

4.The SAR section of VISM segments the IP message into AAL5 ATM cells for transport to the call agent via an edge router.

In CCS processing, communication between VISM and the call agent involves both call control information using xGCP protocols and CCS signaling using Q.931 protocol. Both are transported using the AAL5 ATM connection.

Signaling from the call agent to the PBX is handled in the same manner but in reverse:

1.Signaling from the call agent is stripped of its RUDP/UDP/IP headers and trailers.

2.Signaling is then encapsulated into Q.921 information type frames for transmission to the user???s PBX.

VISM is not involved with the signaling content but acts as an interface between the PBX and the call agent.

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

Signaling Function

Figure 3-5 shows the VISM PRI/backhaul process.

Figure 3-5 PRI/Backhaul Path

MGX 8850 with VISM

44387

For RUDP links between VISM and the call agents, use a session with a session manager.

A session represents a single RUDP link to a specified call agent. Sessions are organized into session groups, and session groups are organized into session sets. VISM architecture supports up to 64 sessions and up to 16 session groups; however, Release 2.2 supports one session.

Multiple RUDP links for a specified call agent are set up as sessions in a single group. A group is required for each call agent for which CCS signaling is to be backhauled. Within a group, each session is assigned a priority level. When an active session fails, the session manager switches to the next highest priority backup session within the group. Figure 3-6 shows the hierarchy of RUDP sets, groups, and sessions.

Figure 3-6 RUDP Session Hierarchy

Session

Set

Session

Group 3

Sessions to Call Agent C

44388

VISM maintains a set of counters for the collection of statistics at both the Q.921 and Q.931 protocol levels. The collected statistics include the number of frames/packets/bytes sent and received, the number of resets, the number of discards and retransmissions, etc. Refer to the CCS session and LAPD display commands in Chapter 5, ???CLI Commands,??? for more information on collected statistics for the CCS session and LAPD display commands.

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

ATM Voice Data Processing Function

Use the CLI PRI/backhaul commands to do the following:

???Create and delete session sets

???Create, delete, configure, and display sessions and sessions groups

???Create, delete, configure, and display D channels for CCS

???Display PRI/backhaul statistics

Refer to Chapter 5, ???CLI Commands,??? for more information on CLI commands.

CAS Processing in AAL2 Trunking Operating Mode

CAS signaling is extracted from the voice data and is transported across the packet network in AAL2 trunking operating mode. The signaling is transported across the same trunk (VC) and the same channel identifier (CID) as its associated voice stream, using AAL2 Type 3 messages in accordance with ITU-T I.366.2. The messages are used for CAS (A,B,C, and D) robbed bits, fax/modem tones, and digits and are transported with triple redundancy.

CCS Processing in AAL2 Trunking Operating Mode

CCS signaling is maintained as Q.931 messages and transported across the packet network using an AAL5 PVC in AAL2 trunking operating mode. The local and remote ends of the PVC are the same as those for the AAL2 PVC trunk carrying the associated voice data.

ATM Voice Data Processing Function

The VISM DSPs process incoming voice data (for compression, ECAN, etc.) and then the data is prepared for transport over the ATM network. Voice samples are processed into ATM packets and then into ATM cells in preparation for transport. VISM then transports the cells to Voice over ATM (VoATM) networks with the following supported operating modes:

???VoIP

???Switched AAL2 PVC

???AAL2 trunking

???AAL1 SVC

Transporting Voice Cells with VoIP

The VoIP switching operating mode processes voice cells in the following order to transport them over ATM networks:

1.Formatted into Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) packets.

Note RTP allows time-stamping of the voice samples, which permits dejittering of the samples transmitted to the destination TDM line.

2.Encapsulated in a UDP packet.

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

ATM Voice Data Processing Function

3.Encapsulated in an IP packet.

4.Converted to AAL5 ATM cells for transmission to an edge router on the network. Figure 3-7 shows the protocol stack for VoIP.

Figure 3-7 VoIP Protocol Stack

Voice Payload (RFC 1889)

27911

Figure 3-8 shows how a voice sample is packetized and transmitted as cells.

Figure 3-8 VoIP Cell Packetization and Transmission

80 bytes of packetized PCM

(10 ms sample)

80-byte packet + 12-byte RTP header = 92 bytes

IP (20 bytes) + UDP (8 bytes) + 92 packet = 120

16 bytes padding

8 bytes AAL5 trailer

= 144 bytes of AAL5 PDU

3 ATM cells per 10 ms

35239

At the layer containing RTP, a 12-byte header is added. At the layer containing UDP, an 8-byte header is added and at the layer containing IP, a 20-byte header is added for a total of 120.

At the layer containing AAL5, the 8-byte AAL5 trailer is added and the data is padded with 16 bytes to make an integral number of ATM cell payload bytes. The resulting protocol data unit (PDU) is 144 bytes in length and is transported in three ATM cells.

A single PVC is set up between the Cisco MGX 8000 series platform and the router. All packets are sent across the PVC regardless of their destination. The router extracts the IP addresses and routes the cells accordingly.

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

ATM Voice Data Processing Function

To improve reliability, VISM supports two independent OC-3 interfaces, each connected to a separate edge router and each with its own PVC. One PVC is designated the primary PVC and the other the secondary PVC. The primary circuit is used unless it fails, in which case VISM switches automatically to the secondary circuit. Switchover may cause a temporary 250-ms delay on the lines.

VISM communicates with the packet network about transmitting the voice payload by using the SONET OC-3 port on the MGX 8000 series platform PXM card. Voice payload samples are formatted and sent across the MGX 8000 series platform cellbus and onto the SONET connection.

Transporting Voice Cells with Switched AAL2 PVC

The switched AAL2 PVC operating mode transports voice cells with up to 64 PVCs. Multiple calls can share a single AAL2 connection simultaneously using a CID. Each PVC is assigned a virtual connection circuit identifier (VCCI). The VCCI/CID to endpoint/DS1/DS0 binding is made dynamically by the call agent as part of the call setup procedure. However, you can permanently set the binding???which makes VISM operate as if it were in AAL2 trunking operating mode.

The AAL2 PVC supports AAL2 profiles and mid-call upspeeds. Codec changes can be supported if they are within the agreed upon profile. The following AAL2 profiles are supported:

???Custom profile 100

???Custom profile 101

???Custom profile 110

???ITU-T I.366.2 profile 1

???ITU-T I.366.2 profile 2

???ITU-T I.366.2 profile 7

???ITU-T I.366.2 profile 8

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

ATM Voice Data Processing Function

Figure 3-9 shows the packetization process for AAL2 cells.

Figure 3-9 AAL2 Cell Packetization and Transmission

53240

Transporting Voice Cells with AAL2 Trunking

The AAL2 trunking operating mode transports voice cells with up to 64 AAL2 trunks. The CID/virtual channel identifier (VCI) for each DS1/DS0 pair is preprovisioned, which ensures that DS0 voice streams are automatically transported over the appropriate trunk.

For CAS applications, voice cells and CAS signaling are transported across the AAL2 trunk. If a channel is configured for CCS signaling, the signaling is transmitted by extracting HDLC frames and forwarding them over preprovisioned AAL5 virtual circuits (the voice cells are still transmitted using AAL2).

VISM does not support any call control functions with the AAL2 trunking operating mode. VISM passes signal traffic across the trunk.

Alarm and packetization handling are the same as in the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode. Refer to the ???Transporting Voice Cells with Switched AAL2 PVC??? section on page 3-13.

Transporting Voice Cells with Switched AAL1 SVC

VISM interacts with a call agent using an xGCP protocol over AAL5 control PVCs. In the switched AAL1 SVC operating mode, the bearer path is VoAAL1 and the bearer connections are SVCs. VISM dynamically sets up and tears down bearer connections.

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

Call Control Function

Call Control Function

Call control is used in the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode only and is managed by the call agents. The call agent performs the following functions:

???Analyzes signaling received from VISM cards and other call agents to monitor the status of all endpoints and connections.

???Signals VISM cards and other call agents to set up and tear down calls.

???Reacts to fax, modem, alarm and other line conditions and events.

???Maintains a dial plan to locate the remote call agent using the dialed number.

???Negotiates profiles and codecs between the called and calling locations.

These functions require call agent communication with the VISM cards under call agent control and peer call agents. Figure 3-10 shows the call agent communications links.

Figure 3-10 Call Agent Communications Links

Call Agent

IP (xGCP)

MGX 8850 with VISM

The interface between the call agent and VISM cards is a gateway call control protocol generically known as xGCP. The following gateway call control protocols are supported:

???Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) 0.1 and 1.0

???Simple Gateway Control Protocol (SGCP) 1.5

???Simple Resource Control Protocol (SRCP)

SRCP enables the VISM card and the call agent to resynchronize. Synchronization occurs when the call agent first assumes control of VISM or after the call agent loses communication with VISM.

All protocols use a UDP/IP connection between the call agent and the VISM cards. The IP address of the call agent can be resolved in the following ways:

???Internal table which you set up with the CLI

???External domain name server (DNS)

You can configure VISM to use the internal table and external DNS in the following ways:

???Internal table only

???External DNS only

???Internal first and external second

???External first and internal second

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

Call Control Function

VISM supports up to eleven domain names and each domain name can have up to eight internal and eight external IP addresses.

Note The external DNS can have up to eight internal IP addresses only.

The interface between the call agent and other call agents is either Signaling System 7 (SS7) or a Cisco extended ISDN User Part (C-ISUP).

Connection Model

SGCP and MGCP gateway call control protocols assume a connection model where the basic constructs are connections and endpoints. Figure 3-11 shows a basic connection model.

Figure 3-11 Connection Model

Call 1

Connection 1

1

Call 2

Connection 2

3

Connection 3

2

4

5

endpoints

31435

Connections are grouped into calls. One or more connections can belong to the same call. Several connections, that may or may not belong to the same call, can terminate in the same endpoint.

The SGCP consists of the following commands:

???Notification request???Used by the call agent. Requests the gateway to send notifications upon the occurrence of specified events in an endpoint.

???Notify Messages???Used by the gateway. Sends a list of observed events to the call agent.

???Create connection???Used by the call agent. Sets up a new connection at the gateway.

???Modify connection???Used by the call agent. Modifies a gateway???s view of a connection.

???Delete connection???Used by the call agent. Terminates a connection.

The MGCP extends SGCP to include the following commands:

???Audit endpoint???Used by the call agent. Audits information related to a given endpoint.

???Audit connection???Used by the call agent. Audits information related to a given connection.

???Restart in progress ???Used by the gateway (VISM). Signals that an endpoint (or a group of endpoints) is brought into or taken out of service.

???Audit gateway???Used by the call agent. Identifies the status of the gateway.

???Audit line???Used by the call agent. Identifies the status of a given line.

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

Call Control Function

xGCP Extensions for AAL2 Switched PVC and AAL2 SVC Operating Modes

VISM supports the following extensions to the xGCP protocols for AAL2 switched and AAL2 SVC applications:

???A new AAL2 Type 3 message type (coded ???010001???) for telephone signal events (TSEs). The following are TSEs:

???ECAN off

???Request audible ring tone

???Ack continuity test

???Request stop audible tone

???Request continuity test

???An extended naming structure to include ATM endpoints. An ATM endpoint enables the following to be included in the definition of an endpoint:

???ATM address

???virtual path identifier (VPI)

???VCI

???VCCI

???CID

???An extended list of connection events in MGCP, known as an ATM Package. These events are:

???Setup complete (for AAL2 CID path)

???Setup failed (for AAL2 CID path)

???Enable CAS via type 3 packets

???Introduction of a Profile Type in call setup commands to describe encoding techniques.

Endpoint Service States

Endpoints exist in one of two service states???in-service (IS) and out-of-service (OOS). The state of an endpoint is determined by user configuration commands and line alarm conditions. When an endpoint is added, it automatically assumes the state of the line.

When endpoints are taken OOS, the transition can be graceful or forced. If graceful, no new connections are permitted while ongoing connections are allowed to terminate normally. If forced, no new connections are permitted and all ongoing connections are terminated immediately.

You can also bring an endpoint to the IS and OOS states with the following commands, which operate either on a line-by-line basis or on the entire VISM card:

???cnflnis???Configure a line as IS

???cnflnoos???Configure a line as OOS

???cnfgwis???Configure a VISM card as IS

???cnfgwoos???Configure a VISM card as OOS

These commands allow you to specify either a graceful or forced transition.

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

Call Control Function

If an alarm condition on a line is raised, all endpoints on the line are brought into a forced transition to OOS. An automatic return to IS is performed when the alarm is cleared, unless a specific OOS command is executed in the meantime.

Restart In Progress Command

The call agent is kept informed of the state of all endpoints with the xGCP Restart In Progress (RSIP) command. The following minimum requirements must be met for this process to operate:

???At least one call agent must be configured using the add media gateway controller (addmgc) command.

???A protocol must be added for each media gateway controller using the add media gateway group entry command (addmgcgrpentry) command.

The VISM card issues an RSIP command in the following situations:

???One or more endpoints are added or deleted with the following commands:

???addendpt

???addendpts

???delendpt

???delendpts

???A line is configured as IS or OOS with one of the following commands:

???cnflnis

???cnflnoos

???The VISM card (gateway) is configured as IS or OOS with one of the following commands:

???cnfgwis

???cnfgwoos

???The VISM card is powered up or reset.

Note In this case, the RSIP is delayed by a random amount (up to a configurable maximum duration) to avoid an avalanche of RSIPs arriving at the call agent when an entire MGX 8000 series platform with multiple VISM cards is powered up or reset.

When the states of multiple endpoints are changed simultaneously, the VISM card minimizes the number of RSIP commands through the use of the wildcard ( * ) convention of naming endpoints.

When an RSIP is sent to call agents, VISM expects an acknowledgment. If no acknowledgment is received after a timeout period, the RSIP is sent again. This process is repeated a number of times, after which, if no acknowledgment is received, an acknowledgment is assumed. You can configure both the timeout period and the number of retries with the cnfxgcpretry command.

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

Embedded VISM Management Function

Connection Admission Control

The VISM connection admission control (CAC) feature calculates the effect of a new call on the bandwidth utilization of the ATM PVC before a new call is either admitted or rejected.

Each call requires a connection between two endpoints and requires a certain amount of bandwidth. Bandwidth is expressed as cells per second (cps) and depends upon the following:

???Encapsulation method

???Coding/compression method

???Enabled/disabled VAD

CAC maintains a table of all currently active calls and their bandwidth requirements. When a new call is requested, CAC calculates the total bandwidth requirements of all the current calls and adds the bandwidth required by the newly requested call. The new total is then compared with the preprovisioned bandwidth (cps) of the ATM PVC.

If the new bandwidth total exceeds the preprovisioned bandwidth of the PVC, the call request is rejected. If the new bandwidth total is less than or equal to the preprovisioned bandwidth of the PVC, the call is accepted.

You can specify the values of the following VAD parameters in the CAC algorithm:

???Over-subscription drop ratio

???Voice duty cycle

VAD parameter specification allows the CAC algorithm to take into account the bandwidth savings of VAD and improves the CAC decision-making process. You can specify the values of these parameters at the card level and at the logical channel level. The default condition is for CAC to be enabled.

Embedded VISM Management Function

VISM management tools allow you to do the following:

???Configure VISM features

???Provision connections

???Display VISM configurations

???Display VISM statistics

Use any of the following tools to manage and configure the VISM card:

???CLI???See Chapter 4, ???Configuring VISM Features,??? for a description of how to configure VISM using the CLI. See Chapter 5, ???CLI Commands,??? for a description of the syntax for each CLI command.

???Third-party Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) manager???Permits you to display and manipulate the individual MIB objects.

???Cisco WAN Manager (CWM) program???Provides a graphics-based interface on a UNIX workstation.

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

Embedded VISM Management Function

Figure 3-12 shows an example of a CWM VISM Card Config screen with the card elements displayed.

Figure 3-12 VISM Card Config Screen???Card Elements Display

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

Embedded VISM Management Function

Figure 3-13 shows an example of a CWM VISM Card Config screen with the VISM features displayed.

Figure 3-13 VISM Card Config Screen???VISM Features Display

Refer to the WAN CiscoView for the MGX 8250 for more information on using CWM.

All three VISM management tools allow you to access and manipulate the VISM Management Information Bases (MIBs) that contain all VISM configuration settings, operating modes, and statistics.

Chapter 3 VISM Functional Description

Embedded VISM Management Function

C H A P T E R 4

Configuring VISM Features

The command line interface (CLI) is a DOS-like interface used to configure VISM cards. This chapter describes the following:

??????Using the Command Line Interface??? section on page 4-1

??????Connecting to Cisco MGX 8000 Series Platforms??? section on page 4-2

??????Configuring VISM Features??? section on page 4-6

Using the Command Line Interface

CLI commands may be followed by a string of required or optional argument identifiers and argument values. The entire string, from the command to the last argument value, is referred to as a command line. Spaces are used to separate all elements in a command line. Type the command, any necessary argument identifiers and argument values, then press Enter.

Note You must press the Enter key at the end of all CLI command lines to complete the command.

For example, the Add Endpoint command, addendpt, adds an endpoint to VISM and has three required arguments. An endpoint defines one end of a connection. The addendpt command format is as follows:

addendpt endpt-num ds1-num ds0-num

When you type a command, use argument values to represent the arguments. For example, to add an endpoint with number 10 on DS1 number 4 and DS0 number 3, the command line is as follows:

addendpt 10 4 3

Some commands require you to type an argument identifier before the argument value. For example, the Clear Alarm command, clralm, requires you to enter an identifier, -ds1, before the argument value. The clralm command format is as follows:

clralm -ds1 line-num

To clear alarms on line 4, the command line is as follows:

clralm -ds1 4

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Connecting to Cisco MGX 8000 Series Platforms

VISM Command Attributes

Use the information in Table 4-1 to determine the log file attributes, VISM card state requirements for command use, and personnel privileges for all VISM commands.

Table 4-1 VISM Command Attributes???Log File, Card State, and Privilege Level

1. The text shown represents the complete CLI command name.

Note For a complete description of the CLI commands in this chapter, see Chapter 5, ???CLI Commands.???

Connecting to Cisco MGX 8000 Series Platforms

The VISM card operates in the following MGX 8000 Series platforms:

???Cisco MGX 8850 Release 1, wide area switch

???Cisco MGX 8250, edge concentrator

???Cisco MGX 8230, edge concentrator

Each platform contains a Processor Module (PXM) back card (see Figure 4-1). Connect your CLI command administration terminal or workstation to the PXM back card???s control port???locally or remotely through a modem.

Note The MGX 8000 Series platform PXM back card contains all connections for managing VISM cards. The VISM card itself has no physical management ports.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Connecting to Cisco MGX 8000 Series Platforms

Figure 4-1 PXM Back Card

PXM-UI

T1

C

L

O

C

K

M

P

C

P

L

A

N

E1 CLOCK

A

L

A

R

M

T1 clock

Maintenance port

Control port

LAN port

E1 clock source

Alarm outputs

12208

Use any of the following devices to connect to a PXM back card:

???A simple alphanumeric terminal (such as a DEC VT100 or equivalent) connected to the control port of the MGX 8000 Series platform PXM back card.

???A computer emulating an alphanumeric terminal (such as the Microsoft Windows Hyper Terminal program) connected to the control port of the MGX 8000 Series platform PXM back card.

???A computer running a Telnet session over Ethernet and connected to the LAN port on the MGX 8000 Series platform PXM back card.

Logging In to PXM and VISM Cards

Complete the following steps to log in to PXM and VISM cards:

Step 1 Physically connect your terminal or workstation to the PXM back card.

The login prompt is displayed:

Login:

Step 2 Type your user name and press Enter.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Connecting to Cisco MGX 8000 Series Platforms

Note The default user name is cisco. You may change this username after your initial login is complete. Consult the system administrator for valid user names.

The password prompt is displayed:

password:

Step 3 Type your password and press Enter.

For security, the password is displayed as asterisks:

password: *****

Note The default password is cisco. You may change this password after your initial login is complete. Consult the system administrator for valid passwords.

The following prompt is displayed:

card number [7]:

Step 4 If you know the VISM card slot number of the card you want to configure, proceed to Step 5. If you do not know the VISM card slot number of the card you want to configure, proceed to Step 6.

Step 5 Type the VISM card slot number and press Enter.

The VISM card prompt is displayed. See the ???VISM Card Prompt??? section on page 4-5 for more information. You have completed logging in to the PXM and VISM cards and can now perform the mandatory initial VISM card configuration. Proceed to the ???Initial VISM Configuration??? section on page 4-6.

Step 6 Type the slot number of the active PXM card (either 7 or 8) and press Enter.

The PXM card prompt is displayed:

NODENAME.1.7.PXM.a >

Step 7 Type the dspcds command to display available card types and press Enter.

A list of available card types and associated states is displayed for the MGX 8000 Series platform with which you are connected. The display is similar to the following:

NODENAME.1.7.PXM.a > dspcds

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Connecting to Cisco MGX 8000 Series Platforms

NODENAME.1.7.PXM.a >

Step 8 Identify, from the list displayed in Step 7, the slot number of the VISM card you want to configure.

Step 9 Type the cc command (to change card), the VISM card slot number identified in Step 8, and press Enter.

The VISM card prompt is displayed. See the ???VISM Card Prompt??? section on page 4-5 for more information.

You have completed logging in to the PXM and VISM cards and can now perform the mandatory initial VISM card configuration. Proceed to the ???Initial VISM Configuration??? section on page 4-6.

VISM Card Prompt

The VISM card prompt is displayed when you successfully log in to a VISM card and has the following format:

NODENAME.1.9.VISM8.a

The VISM card prompt contains the following data:

???Name of the MGX 8000 Series platform to which you are connected

???Number of the shelf???always 1

???Slot number

???Card type

???Card state???active (a) or standby (s)

Logging Out of VISM and PXM Cards

Enter one of the following commands to log out of the VISM and PXM cards:

???bye

???logout

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

The CLI allows you to configure all features and functions of VISM. Configure mandatory commands when you require argument values that are different from the default. Configure optional commands when necessary.

Perform the following tasks with CLI commands to enable your VISM card applications:

1.Perform the mandatory initial VISM configuration.

2.Perform the initial card-level configuration.

3.Configure the TDM side.

4.Configure bearer processing.

Note Configure one type of signaling???CAS or CCS???for each application.

5.Configure the ATM network side.

6.Configure the call agent interface.

Note If you are using a VoIP or an AAL2 trunking application, do not configure a call agent interface.

Initial VISM Configuration

You must execute a sequence of mandatory commands, specific to your operating mode, to make the VISM card fully operational. The mandatory commands for each operating mode are listed in Table 4-2 in order of execution. The remainder of this chapter assists you with using these commands, and commands specific to your operating system.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Table 4-2 Mandatory Initial VISM Configuration Command Sequence for All Operating Modes

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Table 4-2 Mandatory Initial VISM Configuration Command Sequence for All Operating Modes (continued)

1.The cnfvismmode command may be mandatory or optional, depending upon the operating mode with which the VISM card is seen as displayed on your terminal. A VISM card that is not configured is initially displayed in the VoIP operating mode. Subsequent accesses to the VISM card result in the card being displayed in the VoIP operating mode or in the operating mode you have last configured for the card. If the card is displayed as being in the wrong operating mode, the cnfvismmode command is mandatory to change the operating mode. Use the dspvismparam command to verify the VISM card???s current operating mode.

Initial Card Level Configuration

You must complete the following configuration tasks when you initially configure your VISM card.

1.Configure the operating mode.

2.Allocate resources.

3.Configure the connection admission control (CAC).

4.Bring VISM into service.

Configuring the Operating Mode

Complete the following steps to configure the correct operating mode for your VISM card immediately after power is applied:

Step 1 Type the dspvismparam command and press Enter to determine the current VISM operating mode.

Note A new VISM card (one that has not been configured) is displayed by default in VoIP operating mode.

The operating mode of the VISM card is displayed in the first line of the VISM card parameter list.

Step 2 If the VISM card operating mode displayed in Step 1 is correct for your application, proceed to the ???Allocating Resources??? section on page 4-9. If the VISM card operating mode displayed in Step 1 is not correct for your application, proceed to Step 3.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Step 3 Type the cnfvismmode command, an oper-mode argument value, and press Enter to configure the VISM operating mode. Specify the oper-mode argument with one of the following values:

???1 = VoIP switching/VoIP trunking

???2 = AAL2 trunking

???3 = Switched AAL1 SVC

???7 = Switched AAL2 SVC

???8 = Switched AAL2 PVC???this mode is not supported in VISM Release 3.0

???9 = VoIP and Switched ATM AAL1 SVC

You have completed configuring the operating mode for your VISM card. Proceed to the ???Allocating Resources??? section on page 4-9.

Allocating Resources

Complete the following steps to allocate resources???virtual ports, controller resources, and codec templates???to your VISM card.

Step 1 Type the addport command and press Enter to add a virtual port to your VISM card.

This command adds an ATM port on a VISM. There are no arguments for this command. When you add the ATM port, the bandwidth, VPI range, and VCI range are determined. The VPI range is a single VPI value, the slot ID. The added port is not detected by the controller until you create a resource partition (refer to Step 2). The VISM ATM port is pseudo physical.

Step 2 Type the addrscprtn command, the control-id argument value 1, and press Enter to specify the controller resources.

Note Always specify the control-id argument value as 1.

A port can be controlled by more than one controller (for example PNNI and PAR), but supports only one controller at a time. VISM can create one resource partition for each controller in a non-overlapping way. The controller number you specify associates a resource partition to a controller. All resources of a port are associated with the resource partition you specify. When you add a resource partition, the associated controller detects the port as limited by the resource partition.

Step 3 Type the cnfcodectmpl command, a template-num argument value, and press Enter to specify the codec template used with your VISM card. Specify the template-num argument with one of the following values:

???1 = G.711u, G.711a, G.726-16K, G.726-24K, G.726-32K, G.726-40K, G.729a, and G.729ab codecs, and clear channel

Note Template 1 is not supported for the VoIP operating mode.

???2 = G.711u and G.711a uncompressed codecs, and clear channel

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

???3 = G.711u, G.711a, G.726-16k, G.726-24k, G.726-32k, G.726-40k, G.729a, and G.729ab codecs and clear channel

Note Codec template number 3 = template number 1 with T.38 support added. Maximum channels = 120.

???4 = G.711u, G.711a, G. 726-16k, G.726-24k, G.726-32k, G.726-40k, G.729a, G.729ab, G.723.1-H, G.723.1a-H, G.723.1-L, G.723.1a-L codecs and clear channel

Note Template 4 supports a maximum of 64 channels for VISM, and a maximum of 144 channels for VISM-PR. The G.723.1 codecs are not supported for the VISM card.

You have completed allocating resources to your VISM card. Proceed to the ???Configuring Connection Admission Control??? section on page 4-10.

Configuring Connection Admission Control

Complete the following steps, which allow you to:

???Enable or disable CAC.

???Define CAC parameters.

???Configure voiceband data policies for fax/modem carrier loss and fax/modem CAC failure events.

Step 1 Type the cnfcac command, a cac-enable argument value, and press Enter to enable or disable CAC on your VISM card. Specify the argument with one of the following values:

???1 = On

???2 = Off

Note If your application does not require CAC, specify the cac-enable argument as value 2 in Step 1 and proceed to the ???Placing the VISM Card In Service??? section on page 4-11.

Step 2 Type the cnfcacparams command, vad-duty-cycle and vad-tol argument values, and press Enter to configure card level CAC parameter values for VAD tolerance and duty cycle, which are used in CAC algorithms. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???vad-duty-cycle: In the range from 1 to 99 (default = 61)

???vad-tol: In the range from 0 to 10000 (default = 100)

Step 3 Type the cnfconcacparams command, lcn, vad-tol, and vad-duty-cycle argument values, and press Enter to configure values for VAD tolerance and duty cycle, which are used in the CAC algorithms, for a specified logical connection number (PVC). Specify the arguments with the following values:

???lcn: In the range from 131 to 510

???vad-tol: In the range from 1 to 10000 (default = 100)

???vad-duty-cycle: In the range from 1 to 99 (default = 61)

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Step 4 Type the cnfvbdpol command, carrier-loss-pol and cac-reject-pol argument values, and press Enter to specify card level default policies for a fax/modem carrier loss and a fax/modem CAC failure. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???carrier-loss-pol:

???1 = Revert to the previous codec.

???2 = Maintain the upspeed codec.

???cac-reject-pol:

???1 = Delete the connection.

???2 = Maintain the connection and revert to the previous codec.

You have completed configuring CAC on your VISM card. Proceed to the ???Placing the VISM Card In Service??? section on page 4-11.

Placing the VISM Card In Service

Type the cnfgwis command and press Enter to place the VISM card in service. The VISM card prompt terminates with an a to indicate the in-service state:

NODENAME.1.9.VISM8.a

Placing the VISM Card Out of Service

Type the cnfgwoos command, a oos-method argument value, and press Enter to place the VISM card out of service. Specify the oos-method argument with one of the following values:

???2???Forceful

???3???Graceful

The VISM card prompt terminates with an s to indicate the out-of-service (standby) state:

NODENAME.1.9.VISM8.s

Configuring the TDM Side

You must perform the following tasks to configure the TDM side of your networking application:

1.Configure T1 and E1 lines.

2.Configure VISM card clocking.

3.Configure DS0 channels.

Configuring T1 and E1 Lines

This section deals with the configuration of the eight physical T1/E1 ports on the VISM back card or, if bulk distribution is used, the equivalent ports being fed from the Service Resource Module (SRM) card.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Complete the following steps to:

???Add and configure your eight T1 or E1 line ports on the VISM back card.

???Add and configure your eight T1 and E1 line ports on the SRM card if your application requires bulk distribution.

Note You can configure the DS0s on a line after a line is added and configured.

Step 1 Type the addln command, a line-num argument value, and press Enter to add a line to your VISM card. Specify the line-num argument value in the range 1 to 8.

The VISM card prompt and line number are displayed.

Step 2 Type the cnfln command, line-num, line-code, line-length, clock-source, line-type, and loopback-detection argument values, and press Enter to specify the operating parameters for the line added in Step 1. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???line-num: In the range from 1 to 8

???line-code:

???2 = B8ZS for T1 lines

???3 = HDB3 for E1 lines

???4 = AMI for T1 or E1 lines

???line-length:

???8 = AX-SMB-8E1 and AX-R-SMB-8E1 back card types

???9 = AX-RJ48-8E1 and AX-R-RJ48-8E1 back card types

???10 to 15 = T1 back cards, where 10 = 0 to 131 ft, 11 = 131 to 162 ft, 12 = 262 to 393 ft, 13 = 393 to 524 ft, 14 = 524 to 655 ft, and 15 = over 655 ft

???clock-source:

???1 = Loop clock

???2 = Local clock

???line-type:

???1 = DSx1ESF

???2 = DSx1D4

???3 = E1

???4 = E1CRC

???5 = E1MF

???6 = E1MFCRC

???7 = E1 Clear

???8 =

???9 =

???loopback-detection:

???1 = Disabled

???2 = Enabled

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Step 3 Type the cnfalm command, argument identifiers and argument values???-ds1 line-num -red red-sev -rai rai-sev -neu ne-alarm-up -ned ne-alarm-down -net ne-alarm-thresh -feu fe-alarm-up -fed fe-alarm-down -fet fe-alarm-thresh???and press Enter to configure a line for alarm condition handling. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???-ds1 line-num: In the range from 1 to 8

???-red red-sev:

???1 = Minor

???2 = Major

???-rai rai-sev:

???1 = Minor

???2 = Major

???-neu ne-alarm-up: In the range from 1 to 65535

???-ned ne-alarm-down: In the range from 1 to 65535

???-net ne-alarm-thresh: In the range from 1 to 65535

???-feu fe-alarm-up: In the range from 1 to 65535

???-fed fe-alarm-down: In the range from 1 to 65535

???-fet fe-alarm-thresh: In the range from 1 to 65535

Step 4 Type the cnflnsig command, line-num and line-signal-type argument values, and press Enter to configure the signaling mode for the specified line. Specify the line-num and line-signal-type arguments with the following values:

???line-num: In the range from 1 to 8

???line-signal-type:

???1 = CAS

???2 = CCS

???3 = No signaling

Note If you choose CAS signaling for a VISM/VISM-PR E1 line, the supported operating modes are AAL2 trunking and VoIP trunking.

Step 5 Type the cnftrunkcond command, line-num and trunk-cond-enable argument values, and press Enter to enable or disable trunk line conditioning on a line. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???line-num: In the range from 1 to 8

???trunk-cond-enable:

???1 = On

???2 = Off

If you enable trunk line conditioning, VISM conditions the affected DS0 when an alarm indication signal (AIS) is detected on the ATM side. Trunk line conditioning consists of transmitting an idle code pattern for 2.5 seconds followed by the seized code specified in the cnfcascode command.

Note This command is not allowed if endpoints or CCS channels are enabled on the line.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Step 6 Type the addlnloop command, a line-num argument value, and press Enter to set a specified line to the local loopback state. Specify the line-num argument in the range from 1 to 8.

Use the dellnloop command to remove the local loopback state on a VISM line.

Note The VISM CLI has no command for setting a line to the remote loopback state. Use the cnfbert command on the PXM card to set a line to the remote loopback state.

You have completed configuring T1 and E1 lines for your VISM card. Proceed to the ???Placing T1 and E1 Lines In Service??? section on page 4-14.

Placing T1 and E1 Lines In Service

Type the cnflnis command, a line-num argument value, and press Enter to place a T1 or E1 line in service. Specify the line-num argument in the range from 1 to 8.

Note If the VISM card is rebooted, this information configuration using this command is lost.

Placing T1 and E1 Lines Out of Service

Type the cnflnoos command, line-num and oos-method argument values, and press Enter to place a T1 or E1 line out of service. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???line-num: In the range from 1 to 8

???oos-method:

???2 = Forceful

???3 = Graceful

Configuring the PXM and VISM Cards Clocking Source

Complete the following steps to configure the clocking source on your PXM and VISM cards.

Note Refer to Appendix A, ???VISM and VISM-PR Card Clocking Options,??? and the ???Expanded Clock Source Selection??? section on page 4-69 for additional instructions on using the commands and specifying argument values to configure the clocking source on your PXM and VISM cards.

Step 1 Examine the entire configuration of the MGX 8000 Series platform to determine the single clock source.

The type of equipment connected to the VISM T1 or E1 lines may dictate this choice. If the selected clock source is from one of the VISM T1 or E1 lines, that line must be connected to port 1 of the VISM back card. See Figure 1-3 on page 1-4 for more information on VISM back cards and port locations.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Step 2 Type the cnfclksrc command, slot-num.port-num, and clk-type argument values, and press Enter to configure the PXM card clock source. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???slot-num.port-num:

???slot-num = 7 or 8, port-num = 1 to n.

Note Ensure that you type the period with no spaces on either side, between the slot-num argument value and the port-num argument value.

???clk-type argument values:

???P = Primary

???S = Secondary

???N = Null (no external clocking source; use the PXM card???s internal crystal) Specify the cnfclksrc command argument values according to the following rules:

???If the clock source is the external BITS clock (a T1 or E1 port on the PXM back card), specify the configuration as:

cnfclksrc 7.35 P

Note Type 7 for the slot number regardless of the PXM card???s location in the chassis. Type 35 for the port number???the BITS port is always port 35.

??? If the clock source is an external signal on one of the PXM OC3 ports, specify the configuration as:

cnfclksrc 7.n P

Note Type 7 for the slot number regardless of the PXM card???s location in the chassis. The n port parameter value is the OC3 port number in the range 1 to 4.

???If the clock source is the PXM???s internal crystal and no other clock source has been specified, do not configure the clock source. The crystal is the automatic default.

???If you want to change the clocking source from external to the PXM card???s internal crystal, specify the configuration as:

cnfclksrc 7.X N

Note Type 7 for the slot number regardless of the PXM card???s location in the chassis. The X argument value is the either 35 or the OC3 port number, depending upon which is the currently specified source. The null port number argument value cancels the previous configuration and returns the clocking source to the default internal crystal.

??? If the clock source is from a line on a VISM card, specify the configuration as:

cnfclksrc y.1 P

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Note The y argument value is the actual slot number of the VISM card. Always type 1 for port argument value, which represents the line number in this configuration. VISM-PR cards do not have this requirement.

Step 3 Type the cnfln command, the line-num, line-code, line-length, clock-source, line-type, and loop-detection argument values, and press Enter to configure the clocking option defined in Step 2 on your VISM card. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???line-num: In the range from 1 to 8

???line-code:

???2 = B8ZS for T1

???3 = HDB3 for E1

???4 = AMI for T1 or E1

???line-length:

???8 = E1 lines with AX-SMB-8E1 and AX-R-SMB-8E1 back card types

???9 = E1 lines with AX-RJ48-8E1 and AX-R-RJ48-8E1 back card types

???In the range from 10 to 15 = T1 lines

???clock-source:

???1 = Loop clock???clocking from the T1 or E1 line

Note If the clocking source is from a line on your VISM card, you must configure that line???which must be line 1???as loop clock. Configure all remaining lines on all remaining VISM cards as local.

??? 2 = Local???clocking from the PXM card

Note You must configure all lines on all VISM cards as local if the clocking source to the

VISM cards is from the PXM card.

???line-type:

???1 = DSx1ESF

???2 = DSx1D4

???3 = E1

???4 = E1CRC

???5 = E1MF

???6 = E1MFCRC

???7 = E1 clear

???loop-detection:

???1 = Disabled

???2 = Enabled

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Note You must include all argument values when using the cnfln command; however, the line-num and clock-source are the only relevant arguments for configuring the clocking source on your VISM cards.

You have completed configuring the clocking source for your PXM and VISM cards. Proceed to the ???Configuring DS0 Channels??? section on page 4-17.

Configuring the PXM1E or PXM45 Card as Clocking Source

Use the cnfncdpclksrc command to configure the PXM1E or PXM45 card as the primary clock source.

Use the following commands to display and verify your configuration:

???dspncdpclkinfo

???dspncdpclksrc

Refer to the ???Related Documentation??? section on page xiv for the appropriate document to use the commands in this section.

Configuring DS0 Channels

You are now ready to configure the 24 (T1) or 31 (E1) DS0 channels on the VISM card???s T1 or E1 lines. Table 4-3 describes the VISM/VISM-PR DS0 density when the cards are used in combination with the supported codecs.

Table 4-3 VISM/VISM-PR DS0 Density with Codec Support

You must complete the following tasks to configure a DS0 channel:

1.Add and configure DS1 line and DS0 endpoints.

2.Configure CCS or CAS signaling.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Add and Configure DS1 Lines and DS0 Endpoints

Complete the following steps to add and configure a DS1 line and DS0 endpoints:

Step 1 Type the addendpt command, endpt-num, ds1-num, and ds0-num argument values, and press Enter to add a DS1 line and a DS0 endpoint. This step ensures that a call with a specified endpoint is tied to a specific line and channel. Specify the arguments with the following values.

Note If you choose CAS signaling for a VISM/VISM-PR E1 line, the supported operating modes are AAL2 trunking and VoIP trunking.

???endpt-num:

???For template number 1:

For VISM, in the range from 1 to 145

For VISM-PR T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM-PR E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 2:

For VISM T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 3:

For VISM, in the range from 1 to 120

For VISM-PR T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM-PR E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 4:

For VISM-PR, in the range from 1 to 144

???ds1-num: The physical line number in the range 1 to 8

???ds0-num:

???For T1 lines, from 1 to 24

???For non-CAS E1 lines, from 1 to 31

???For CAS E1 lines, from 1 to 15 and 17 to 31

Note You must specify DS0 16 for E1 lines if your application requires CAS signaling.

Step 2 Type the addendpts command, start-endpt, start-line-num, start-ds0-num, and endpt-quantity argument values, and press Enter to add a number of endpoints in one command. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???start-endpt:

???For template number 1:

For VISM, in the range from 1 to 145

For VISM-PR T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM-PR E1, in the range from 1 to 248

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

???For template number 2:

For VISM T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 3:

For VISM, in the range from 1 to 120

For VISM-PR T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM-PR E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 4:

For VISM-PR, in the range from 1 to 144

???start-line-num (DS1 line): In the range from 1 to 8

???start-ds0-num (DS0 channel):

???For T1 lines, from 1 to 24

???For non-CAS E1 lines, from 1 to 31

???For CAS E1 lines, from 1 to 15 and 17 to 31

???endpt-quantity:

???For template number 1:

For VISM, in the range from 1 to 145

For VISM-PR T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM-PR E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 2:

For VISM T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 3:

For VISM, in the range from 1 to 120

For VISM-PR T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM-PR E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 4:

For VISM-PR, in the range from 1 to 144

Step 3 Type the addendptloop command, an endpt-num argument value, and press Enter to place a specific endpoint???and so a specific DS1/DS0???into the loopback state in the TDM direction. Specify the endpt-num argument value from the following ranges:

???For template number 1:

???For VISM, in the range from 1 to 145

???For VISM-PR T1, in the range from 1 to 192

???For VISM-PR E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 2:

???For VISM T1, in the range from 1 to 192

???For VISM E1, in the range from 1 to 248

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

???For template number 3:

???For VISM, in the range from 1 to 120

???For VISM-PR T1, in the range from 1 to 192

???For VISM-PR E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 4:

???For VISM-PR, in the range from 1 to 144

Step 4 Type the cnfds0loop command, line-num, ds0-num, and loopback-type argument values, and press Enter to place a specific DS1/DS0 into one of three loopback states. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???line-num: In the range from 1 to 8

???ds0-num:

???In the range from 1 to 31 for E1 lines

???In the range from 1 to 24 for T1 lines

???loopback-type:

???1 = No loopback

???2 = Remote loopback

???3 = Local loopback

You have completed adding and configuring a DS1 line and DS0 endpoints. Proceed to one of the following sections:

??????Configuring TDM Side Signaling for Applications Using CCS??? section on page 4-20.

??????Configuring TDM Side Signaling for Applications Using CAS??? section on page 4-23.

Configuring TDM Side Signaling for Applications Using CCS

Note If your application requires CAS signaling, proceed to the ???Configuring TDM Side Signaling for Applications Using CAS??? section on page 4-23.

CCS signaling uses a dedicated channel on a DS1 line to carry the signaling for the other channels on the line. You must identify the signaling channel to the VISM card. CCS signaling is used for the following operating modes:

???VoIP trunking.

???AAL2 trunking???Signaling is transported across the trunk as Q.931 messages in ATM cells using AAL5.

???Switched AAL2 PVC???Signaling is backhauled to the call agent using Q.921 frames on the TDM side and RUDP/UDP/IP/Q.2931 on the call agent side.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Complete the following steps to add and configure CCS signaling:

Step 1 Type the addccs command, line-num, ds0-num, and lcn argument values, and press Enter to add a CCS channel to your VISM card. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???line-num: In the range from 1 to 8

???ds0-num:

???In the range from 1 to 24 for T1

???In the range from 1 to 31 for E1

???lcn: In the range from 131 to 510

Step 2 If you are configuring CCS for the AAL2 trunking operating mode, the CCS configuration is complete. Proceed to the ???Configuring Bearer Processing??? section on page 4-27. If you are configuring CCS for the VoIP switching operating mode, you must create a Q.921 link access protocol for the D channel (LAPD) link for the channel and specify its argument values. Proceed to Step 3.

Step 3 Type the addlapd command, line-num, ds0-num, |lapd-side| and |lapd-app-type| argument values, and press Enter to add an ISDN PRI channel on a DS1/DS0.

Specify the arguments with the following values:

???line-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

???ds0-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

???|lapd-side|:

???1 = Network (default)

???2 = User

???|lapd-app-type|:

???1 = PRI (default)

???2 = GR-303 (currently unsupported)

Step 4 Type the cnflapdtype command, line-num, ds0-num, and lapd-type argument values, and press Enter to specify the LAPD stack type. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???line-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

???ds0-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

???lapd-type:

???1 = ITU

???3 = ATT5ESSPRA

???4 = ATT4ESS

???6 = NTDMS100PRA

???7 = VN2 or 3

???8 = INSNet

???9 = TR6MPC

???10 = TR6PBX

???12 = AUSP

???13 = NIL

???14 = SSETSI

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

???15 = BC303TMC

???16 = BC303CSC

???17 = NTDMS250

???18 = Bellcore

???19 = NI2

Step 5 Type the cnflapdwinsize command, line-num, ds0-num, and iframe-num argument values, and press Enter to specify the LAPD window size. The iframe-num value is the maximum number of outstanding I-frames that can be accumulated before sending an acknowledgment. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???line-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

???ds0-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

???iframe-num: In the range from 1 to 127

Step 6 Type the cnflapdretrans command, line-num, ds0-num, and n200 argument values, and press Enter to specify the maximum allowable frame retransmissions. Specify the arguments with the following values:

??? line-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

??? ds0-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

??? n200: In the range from 1 to 10

Step 7 Type the cnflapdtimer command, line-num, ds0-num, frame-trans-time, and frame-exchange-time argument values, and press Enter to specify the two LAPD timers. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???line-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

???ds0-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

???frame-trans-time (time, at the end of which, a frame transmission can be initiated):

???1000 to 1023000 for PRI (specify in increments of 50 ms)

???100 to 350 for GR-303 (specify in increments of 50 ms)

Note The specified value for frame-trans-time must be less than the specified value for frame-exchange-time.

???frame-exchange-time (maximum time allowed without frames being exchanged) argument values:

???1000 to 1023000 for PRI (specify in increments of 10000 ms)

???10000 to 300000 for GR-303 (specify in increments of 10000 ms)

You have completed adding and configuring CCS. Proceed to the ???Configuring Bearer Processing??? section on page 4-27.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Configuring TDM Side Signaling for Applications Using CAS

Note If your application requires CCS, see the ???Configuring TDM Side Signaling for Applications Using CCS??? section on page 4-20.

CAS signaling is used for the following operating modes:

???VoIP trunking.

???VoIP switching???TDM side signaling is translated in xGCP messages to the call agent.

???AAL2 trunking???Signaling is transported across the trunk as Q.931 messages in AAL2 cells using AAL5.

???Switched AAL2 PVC???Signaling is backhauled to the call agent using xGCP on the TDM side and Reliable User Datagram Protocol (RUDP)/User Datagram Protocol (UDP)/IP/Q.2931 on the call agent side.

Complete the following steps to add and configure CAS signaling.

Note If you choose CAS signaling for a VISM/VISM-PR E1 line, the supported operating modes are AAL2 trunking and VoIP trunking. In addition Step 1 through Step 8 and Step 11 through Step 13 are used only in the VoIP switching and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

Step 1 Type the cnfcasparamsource command, endpt-num and cas-source argument values, and press Enter to configure the source of CAS-related timer parameters for a specified endpoint. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???endpt-num:

???For template number 1:

For VISM, in the range from 1 to 145

For VISM-PR T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM-PR E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 2:

For VISM T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 3:

For VISM, in the range from 1 to 120

For VISM-PR T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM-PR E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 4:

For VISM-PR, in the range from 1 to 144

???cas-source:

???1 = CAS application file

???2 = Current VISM MIB file

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Note The cnfcasparamsource command permits different CAS-related timer values for different endpoints, but all are associated with the same CAS variant.

Step 2 Type the cnfcasonhooktime command, endpt-num and onhooktime argument values, and press Enter to specify the minimum time an on hook-pattern must be present to be recognized as an on-hook signal. Specify the arguments with the following values:

??? endpt-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

??? onhooktime: In the range from 10 to 1000

Step 3 Type the cnfcasoffhooktime command, endpt-num and offhooktime argument values, and press Enter to specify the minimum time an off-hook pattern must be present to be recognized as an off-hook signal. Specify the arguments with the following values:

??? endpt-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

??? offhooktime: In the range from 10 to 1000

Step 4 Type the cnfcaswinktime command, endpt-num, min-make-time, max-make-time, and min-break-time argument values, and press Enter to specify the minimum and maximum make times and the minimum break time. A wink begins with an on-hook pattern, goes to off-hook, and returns to on-hook. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???endpt-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

???min-make-time: In the range from 10 to 1000

???max-make-time: In the range from 10 to 3000

???min-break-time: In the range from 10 to 1000

Note All three make and break duration time argument values must be observed for the signaling sequence to be recognized as a wink.

Step 5 Type the cnfcasglaretime command, endpt-num and glaretime argument values, and press Enter to specify the glare time. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???endpt-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

???glaretime: In the range from 10 to 1000

Step 6 Type the cnfcasguardtime command, endpt-num and guardtime argument values, and press Enter to specify the guard time. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???endpt-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

???guardtime argument values:

???In the range from 10 to 1000

Step 7 Type the cnfcasdialdelay command, endpt-num and dial-delay argument values and press Enter to configure the CAS dial delay (wait time).

Dial delay is the time that VISM waits before sending dialing digits after sending an off-hook event.

Note The cnfcasdialdelay command applies to immediate start protocols only.

Specify the arguments with the following values:

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

???endpt-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

???dial-delay: In the range from 10 to 1000

Step 8 To configure CAS for the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode, proceed to Step 11. To configure CAS for the AAL2 trunking operating mode, proceed to Step 9.

Step 9 Type the cnfcascode command, endpt-num, |endpt-num|, idle-code, and seized-code argument values and press Enter to specify the idle and seized codes for one or more endpoints. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???endpt-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

Note If the |endpt-num| optional argument value is used in combination with this argument, the endpt-num argument value is the first endpoint in a consecutive range of endpoints.

???|endpt-num|:

???For template number 1:

For VISM, in the range from 1 to 145

For VISM-PR T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM-PR E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 2:

For VISM T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 3:

For VISM, in the range from 1 to 120

For VISM-PR T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM-PR E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 4:

For VISM-PR, in the range from 1 to 144

Note The |endpt-num| optional argument value indicates the last endpoint in a consecutive range of endpoints.

???idle-code (4-bit idle code): In the range from 0 to 15 represents the four A, B, C, and D signaling as bits 3, 2, 1, and 0 respectively with bit 3 the most significant.

???seized-code (4-bit seized code): In the range from 0 to 15 represents the four A, B, C, and D signaling as bits 3, 2, 1, and 0 respectively with bit 3 the most significant.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Step 10 Type the cnfds0localcas command, line-num, ds0-num, local-cas-enable, and local-cas-pattern argument values, and press Enter to configure a local CAS bit pattern for a T1 line and DS0.

Note The cnfds0localcas command is not allowed if the line is E1 or not enabled, or the DS0 is in a remote loop state, or if the line signaling type is CAS.

Specify the arguments with the following values:

???line-num: 1 to 8 (T1 lines only)

???ds0-num: 1 to 24

???local-cas-enable:

???1 = Enable

???2 = Disable

???local-cas-pattern: In the range from 1 (default) to 15

Note If the local-cas-enable argument value = 1, you must specify a local-cas-pattern argument value.

Step 11 Type the addcasvar command, var-name, file-name and |source| argument values, and press Enter to add a CAS variant to your VISM card.

Note A file containing the CAS variant information must be downloaded to your MGX 8000 Series PXM card using a separate application (TFTP) before you can execute this command.

Specify the arguments with the following values:

???var-name (name of the CAS variant): A text string of 1 to 64 alphanumeric characters.

???file-name:

???wink_did_dod.o = wink start

???ground_start.o = ground start

???wink_did_dod_mf.o = wink start multifrequency

???q50.o = Q.50

???fgd_ea_incoming.o = for endpoints connected to an end office

???fgd_ea_outgoing.o = for endpoints connected to an access carrier

???fgd_os_e911.o = for endpoints connected to FDG OSS (Feature group D operator services system.

???loop_start.o = loop start

???delay_did_dod.o = dial delay, DTMF

???delay_did_dod_mf.o = dial delay, MF

???immed_did_dod.o = immediate start

???immed_did_dod_mf.o = immediate start, MF

???In the range from 1 to 32 alphanumeric characters???user configured files only.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

???|source| (CAS variant file location):

???1 = Unspecified. If TFTP domain is configured, the location is the TFTP server. If not found in the TFTP server, the file is treated as built-in.

???2 = User configured (built-in) file location.

???3 = External???resides on the TFTP server.

Step 12 Type the cnfcasvar command, var-name, country-code, partial-time, critical-time, and interdigit-timeout argument values, and press Enter to configure a CAS variant and CAS timing parameters for the variant added in Step 11. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???var-name: Type the value used in Step 11.

???country-code: The two-character country code of the variant.

???partial-time (partial dial time): In the range from 10 to 10000, in increments of 10 seconds.

???critical-time (critical timing): In the range from 0 to 10000, in increments of 10 seconds.

???interdigit-timeout (interdigit timeout for MF digits): In the range from 1 to 10 seconds.

Step 13 Type the cnfcasendpt command, endpt-num and var-name argument values, and press Enter to associate an endpoint with a CAS variant. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???endpt-num: Type a value used in Step 9.

???var-name: Type the value used in Step 11.

You have completed adding and configuring CAS signaling. Proceed to the ???Configuring Bearer Processing??? section on page 4-27.

Configuring Bearer Processing

Processing of the bearer payload takes place either upon receipt of the payload from a T1 or E1 line or prior to transmission over a T1 or E1 line. You must complete the following tasks to configure bearer processing:

1.Configure codecs.

2.Configure ECAN.

3.Configure jitter.

Configuring Codecs

Complete the following steps to assign and configure a codec template:

Step 1 Type the cnfcodectmpl command, a template-num argument value, and press Enter to specify a codec template. Specify the template-num argument value from the following:

???1 = G.711u, G.711a, G.726-16k, G.726-24k, G.726-32k, G.726-40k, G.729a, and G.729ab codecs, and clear channel

Note Template 1 is not supported for the VoIP operating mode.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

??? 2 = G.711u and G.711a codecs, and clear channel

Note The cnfcodectmpl command is included in the ???Allocating Resources??? section on page 4-9 but is included here for your convenience.

???3 = G.711u, G.711a, G.726-16k, G.726-24k, G.726-32k, G.726-40k, G.729a, and G.729ab codecs, clear channel, and T.38 fax transfer

???4 = G.711u, G.711a, G. 726-16k, G.726-24k, G.726-32k, G.726-40k, G.729a, G.729ab, G.723.1-H, G.723.1a-H, G.723.1-L, G.723.1a-L codecs and clear channel

Step 2 Type the cnfcodecparams command, codec-type, codec-pkt-period, |preference, codec-string, and iana-type| argument values, and press Enter to specify various codec parameters for use in the VoIP operating mode.

The packetization period is defined in three separate commands depending upon the ATM method used:

???Use the cnfcodecparams command for VoIP switching applications. Complete this step.

???Use the addcid command for AAL2 trunking applications. See the ???Configuring AAL2 Trunking Operating Mode Parameters??? section on page 4-36.

???Use the addrtpcon command for AAL2 trunking applications.

???Use the cnfprofelemvoice command for switched AAL2 PVC applications. See the ???Configuring Switched AAL2 PVC Operating Mode Parameters??? section on page 4-38.

Specify the arguments with the following values:

???codec-type: In the range from 1 to 14.

???codec-pkt-period:

???10

???20

???30

???40

???60

???preference:

???0 = Ignore preference

???In the range from 1 (highest) to 13 (lowest).

???codec-string: In the range from 1 to 20 ASCII characters.

???iana-type (IANA registered codec type): In the range from 0 to 96.

Step 3 Type the cnfcodecneg command, the codec-priority argument value, and press Enter to specify a codec preference order when there are several codec lists???from the call agent local connection option (LCO) list, local MIB, or a list received from the remote gateway in the session description protocol (SDP) data. Specify the codec-priority argument value with one of the following:

???1 = LCO list, remote SDP data list, local MIB

???2 = LCO list, local MIB, remote SDP data list

???3 = Remote SDP data list, LCO list, local MIB

???4 = Remote SDP data list, local MIB, LCO list

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

???5 = Local MIB, LCO list, remote SDP data list

???6 = Local MIB, remote SDP data list, LCO list

You have completed assigning and configuring the codec template. Proceed to the ???Configuring ECAN??? section on page 4-29.

Configuring ECAN

Complete the following steps to enable and configure echo cancellation (ECAN) on a line-by-line basis:

Step 1 Type the cnfecanenable command, line-num and ecan-enable argument values, and press Enter to enable (or disable) ECAN for a line. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???line-num: In the range from 1 to 8.

???ecan-enable:

???1 = Disable

???2 = Enable

Step 2 Type the cnfecanrec command, line-num and res-echo-control argument values, and press Enter to set the residual echo control. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???line-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

???res-echo-control:

???1 = Cancel only

???2 = Suppress residual

???4 = Comfort noise

Step 3 Type the cnfecantail command, line-num and max-ecan-tail argument values, and press Enter to specify the ECAN algorithm???s maximum tail length. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???line-num: Type the value used in Step 1.

???max-ecan-tail (defined in milliseconds):

???24

???32

???48

???64

???80

???96

???112

???128

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Step 4 Type the cnferl command, the echo-ret-loss argument value, and press Enter to specify the ECAN algorithm???s return echo loss applied by ECAN DSPs, in decibels. Specify the echo-ret-loss argument with one of the following values:

???echo-ret-loss:

???1 = 0 dB

???2 = 3 dB

???3 = 6 dB

???4 = 1 dB

Step 5 Type the cnfconvbdpol command, lcn, carrier-loss-pol, and cac-reject-pol argument values, and press Enter to specify the fax/modem upspeed connection admission control (CAC) failure and carrier loss policies for a channel. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???lcn (logical channel number): In the range from 131 to 510.

???carrier-loss-pol (carrier loss policy):

???1 = Revert to the previous codec

???2 = Maintain the upspeed codec

???3 = Unspecified

???cac-reject-pol (CAC rejection policy):

???1 = Delete the connection

???2 = Maintain the connection

???3 = Unspecified

You have completed enabling and configuring ECAN on your lines. Proceed to the ???Configuring Jitter??? section on page 4-30.

Configuring Jitter

You can dejitter the voice payload to improve the quality of the egress voice stream.

Note If your application uses the AAL2 trunking operation mode, you cannot change the jitter parameters while the CIDs are active.

Complete the following steps to specify and configure jitter mode:

Step 1 Type the cnfjtrmode command, the jitter-mode argument value, and press Enter to set the jitter mode. Specify the jitter-mode argument with one of the following values:

???1 = Fixed buffer size; recommended value if the jitter amount is expected to be constant or near constant.

???2 = Adaptive; you specify a starting buffer size and VISM adapts the buffer size to handle jitter.

Step 2 If you chose a fixed buffer size in Step 1, you have completed configuring jitter. Proceed to the ???Configuring the ATM Network Side??? section on page 4-31. If you chose an adaptive buffer size in Step 1, proceed to Step 3.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Step 3 Type the cnfjtrinitdelay command, the jitter-buffer-size argument value, and press Enter to specify the starting buffer size. Specify the jitter-buffer-size argument (defined in bytes) with a value from one of the following ranges:

???For template numbers 1, 3, and 4, in the range from 0 to 100 in increments of 10.

???For template number 2, in the range from 0 to 100 in increments of 5.

You have completed configuring jitter. Proceed to the ???Configuring the ATM Network Side??? section on page 4-31.

Configuring PNNI for AAL1/AAL2 SVCs

Use the cnfpncon command to configure Private Network-to-Network Interface (PNNI) priority routing for AAL1/AAL2 switched virtual circuits (SVCs). Refer to Chapter 5, ???CLI Commands,??? for more information on using the cnfpncon command.

Configuring the ATM Network Side

Configuring the ATM network side consists of setting up ATM PVCs across the network and providing the mechanism by which calls are routed over the correct PVC. The PVC configuration depends on the VISM operating mode you require for your application.

???The Voice over IP switching operating mode requires you to set up an AAL5 PVC between the VISM card and the PXM card, and then to an edge router. A single PVC is set up (a secondary PVC may also be set up for redundancy). The PVC is used for bearer voice traffic and gateway protocol communication between VISM and the call agent. The router extracts the IP frames from the ATM cells and routes the frames accordingly.

???The AAL2 trunking operating mode requires you to set up as many as 64 AAL2 PVCs connected to each remote location supported by the network. The PVCs carry voice traffic and optional CAS signaling.

Each PVC is set up as three segments consisting of two local segments and one network segment. The local segments are set up between the two VISM cards (one at the end of the PVC) and their respective PXM cards. The network segment is set up between the two PXM cards across the network. Refer to the Cisco MGX 8250 and MGX 8230 Release l installation and configuration guides for more information.

In AAL2 trunking operating mode, you must bind endpoints to specific DS0s using the addendpoint(s) commands. You must also create CIDs (connection identifiers) for each PVC that binds the endpoints to the CID and a PVC. This ensures that calls arriving at a specific DS0 are automatically routed to the preconfigured CID and PVC over nailed-down trunks. There is no switched or call agent involvement.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

???The switched AAL2 PVC operating mode requires you to set up as many as 64 AAL2 PVCs connected to each remote location supported by the network. The PVCs carry voice traffic across the ATM network.

Each PVC is set up as three segments consisting of two local segments and one network segment. The local segments are set up between the two VISM cards (one at the end of the PVC) and their respective PXM cards. The network segment is set up between the two PXM cards across the network. Refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 Release 1 installation and configuration guides for more information.

In switched AAL2 PVC operating mode, you must bind endpoints to specific DS0s using the addendpoint(s) commands. You must also create VCCIs (virtual circuit connection identifiers), which identify each PVC and associate each PVC with a specific remote ATM address. At call setup time, the call agent informs VISM which VCCI to use for the call and instructs VISM to set up a CID for transport across the VCCI. This ensures that the binding of a DS0 to a CID and PVC is dynamic by using of the called address.

Configuring PVC Connections for All Operating Modes

Complete the following steps to configure PVC connections for all operating modes:

Step 1 Type the addcon command, local-vci, pref-level, pvc-conn-type, conn-app, peak-cell-rate, conn-type, |remote-conn-id, service-type, sus-cell-rate, and max-burst-rate| argument values, and press Enter to add an ATM PVC between the VISM card and the MGX 8000 Series platform PXM card. Specify the addcon command arguments with the following values:

???local-vci: In the range from 131 to 510.

???pref-level:

???1 = Primary

???2 = Secondary (for redundancy)

???pvc-conn-type:

???1 = AAL5

???2 = AAL2

???3 = AAL1

???conn-app:

???1 = Control

???2 = Bearer

???3 = Signaling

???peak-cell-rate (defined as cells per second):

???In the range from 1 to 80000 for VoIP bearer.

???In the range from 1 to 20000 for VoIP control.

???In the range from 1 to 50000 for AAL2 T1.

???In the range from 1 to 60000 for AAL2 E1.

???In the range from 1 to 400 for AAL2 signaling (trunking).

???In the range from 1 to 90000 for AAL5 bearer.

???In the range from 1 to 10000 for AAL5 control.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

???conn-type (type of connection):

???1 = Master

???2 = Slave (default)

???|remote-conn-id| (remote connection identifier):

???Type the value in the following format: nodename.slot.port.vpi.vci

Note Use the optional |remote-conn-id| argument only if you selected the conn-type argument value of 1 (master).

???|service-type|:

???1 = Constant bit rate (CBR)

???2 = Variable bit rate real time, VBR (RT)

???3 = Variable bit rate non-real time, VBR (NRT)

???4 = VBR (RT) 3

???5 = VBR (RT) 2

???6 = VBR (NRT) 2

???7 = VBR (NRT) 3

???|sus-cell-rate| (sustainable cell rate):

???In the range from 1 to the value you specified for the peak-cell-rate argument.

???|max-burst-rate| (maximum number of cells transmitted at the peak cell rate):

???In the range from 1 to 10 times the value you specified for the sus-cell-rate argument.

Step 2 Type the cnfcon command, lcn, peak-cell-rate, service-type, sus-cell-rate, and max-burst-rate argument values and press Enter if you need to refine the configuration parameters of the connection added in Step 1 and identify the connection by the logical channel number. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???lcn: Type the value you entered for the local-vci argument in Step 1.

???peak-cell-rate (defined as cells per second):

???In the range from 1 to 80000 for VoIP bearer.

???In the range from 1 to 20000 for VoIP control.

???In the range from 1 to 50000 for AAL2 T1.

???In the range from 1 to 60000 for AAL2 E1.

???In the range from 1 to 400 for AAL2 signaling (trunking).

???In the range from 1 to 90000 for AAL5 bearer.

???In the range from 1 to 10000 for AAL5 control.

Note The peak-cell-rate argument value cannot be changed if the calls or connections for signaling and control are active.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

???service-type:

???1 = Constant bit rate (CBR)

???2 = Variable bit rate real time???VBR (RT)

???3 = Variable bit rate non-real time???VBR (NRT)

???4 = VBR (RT) 3

???5 = VBR (RT) 2

???6 = VBR (NRT) 2

???7 = VBR (NRT) 3

???sus-cell-rate (sustained cell rate, defined as cells per second):

???In the range from 15 to the value you specified for the peak-cell-rate argument.

???max-burst-rate (maximum burst rate, defined as cells per second):

???In the range from 1 to 10 times the value you specified for the sus-cell-rate argument.

Step 3 Type the addconloop command, the lcn argument value, and press Enter to set a loopback on a VISM PVC with the loopback in the direction of cellbus. Specify the lcn argument value with a value in the range from 131 to 510.

Note You can use the delconloop command to remove a loopback on a VISM PVC.

You have completed configuring PVC connections. Proceed to one of the following sections, as appropriate:

???Configuring VoIP Switching/Trunking Operating Mode Parameters, page 4-34.

???Configuring AAL2 Trunking Operating Mode Parameters, page 4-36.

???Configuring Switched AAL2 PVC Operating Mode Parameters, page 4-38.

Configuring VoIP Switching/Trunking Operating Mode Parameters

Complete the following steps to configure VoIP switching operating mode parameters:

Step 1 Type the cnfconprotect command, lcn, protect-enable, lock-state, and second-lcn argument values, and press Enter to configure primary and secondary PVCs to provide protection in the event of a PVC failure. Specify the argument with the following values:

???lcn: In the range from 131 to 510.

???protect-enable:

???1 = On

???2 = Off

???lock-state:

???1 = Unlock

???2 = Lock

???second-lcn (secondary LCN): In the range from 131 to 510.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Step 2 Type the cnfdeftos command, control-prec, control-tos, |bearer-prec|, and |bearer-tos| argument values, and press Enter to configure the type of service for both control and bearer IP packets.

Note If you do not execute the cnfdeftos command, card level default values are used.

Specify the arguments with the following values:

???control-prec: In the range from 0 to 7 (default = 3)

???control-tos (type of service for control packets):

???0 (default)

???1

???2

???4

???8

???bearer-prec: In the range from 0 to 7 (default = 5)

???bearer-tos (type of service for bearer packets):

???0 (default)

???1

???2

???4

???8

Note The bearer-prec and bearer-tos arguments are used during call setup in cases where values are not supplied by a call agent.

Step 3 Type the cnfvoiptransparams command, dtmf-trans, cas-trans, and |event-neg-enable|, |event-neg-pol|, and |sid-type| argument values, and press Enter to configure the VoIP transportation characteristics across the network. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???dtmf-trans (DTMF tones relayed to the other endpoint):

???1 = On

???2 = Off

???cas-trans (CAS bits relayed to the other endpoint):

???1 = On

???2 = Off

???event-neg-enable (Optional):

???1 = On

???2 = Off

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

???event-neg-pol (Optional; event negotiation policy):

???1 = None

???2 = Proprietary (default)

???3 = All

???sid-type (Optional; SID payload type): In the range from 0 to 255 (default = 13)

You have completed configuring the VoIP switching operating mode parameters. Proceed to the ???Configuring the Call Agent Interface??? section on page 4-44.

Configuring AAL2 Trunking Operating Mode Parameters

Complete the following steps to configure AAL2 trunking operating mode parameters:

Step 1 Type the addcid command, endpt-num, lcn, cid-num, codec-type, profile-type, profile-num, |vad-enable, vad-init-timer, ecan-enable, type-3-red, cas-trans, dtmf-trans, idle-code-sup, and pkt-period| argument values, and press Enter to add a channel identifier (CID) to an AAL2 PVC.

The CID is a mechanism within AAL2 that allows multiple calls to be transported across a single AAL2 PVC. The addcid command binds an endpoint to a logical channel (PVC). Specify the arguments with the following values:

???endpt-num (endpoint to be related to the LCN/CID pair being added):

???For template number 1:

For VISM, in the range from 1 to 145

For VISM-PR T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM-PR E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 2:

For VISM T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 3:

For VISM, in the range from 1 to 120

For VISM-PR T1, in the range from 1 to 192 For VISM-PR E1, in the range from 1 to 248

???For template number 4:

For VISM-PR, in the range from 1 to 144

???lcn (LCN of the LCN/CID pair): In the range from 131 to 510.

???cid-num (CID of the LCN/CID pair): In the range from 8 to 255.

???codec-type:

???1 = G.711u

???2 = G.711a

???3 = G.726-32k

???4 = G.729a

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

???5 = G.729ab

???6 = Clear channel (VAD must be off)

???7 = G.726-16k

???8 = G.726-24k

???9 = G.726-40k

???11 = G.723-H

???12 = G.723a-H

???13 = G.723.1-L

???14 = G.723.1a-L

???profile-type (used for the CID):

???1 = International Telecommunication Union (ITU) I.366.2

???3 = Custom

???profile-num:

???1 = for the ITU profile

???2 = for the ITU profile

???3 = for the ITU profile

???7 = for the ITU profile

???8 = for the ITU profile

???12 = for the ITU profile

???100 = for custom profiles

???101 = for custom profiles

???110 = for custom profiles

???200 = for custom profiles

???vad-enable:

???1 = On

???2 = Off

???vad-init-timer (holdover timer; in milliseconds): In the range from 250 to 65535 (default = 250)

???ecan-enable:

???1 = On (default)

???2 = Off

???type-3-red (triple redundancy protection for CAS type 3 packets):

???1 = On

???2 = Off

???cas-trans:

???1 = On (default)

???2 = Off

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

???dtmf-trans (DTMF tone transport as AAL2 type 3 packets):

???1 = On (default)

???2 = Off

Note The dtmf-trans argument value must be set to 1 (on) when the codec-type is configured for codecs other than G.711 and G.726.

???idle-code-sup (idle code suppression):

???1 = On

???2 = Off

???pkt-period (defined in milliseconds):

???10

The pkt-period argument requires you to configure packetization in the following ways for the other two operating modes:

???Use the cnfcodedecparams for the VoIP operating mode.

???Use the cnfprofelemvoice command for the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode. See the ???Configuring Switched AAL2 PVC Operating Mode Parameters??? section on page 4-38 for more information.

Step 2 Type the cnfaal2subcellmuxing command, the mux-enable argument value, and press Enter to enable or disable subcell multiplexing. Specify the mux-enable argument with one of the following values:

???1 = On

???2 = Off

You have completed configuring the AAL2 trunking operating mode parameters.

Configuring Switched AAL2 PVC Operating Mode Parameters

Note The switched AAL2 PVC operating mode is not supported in VISM Release 3.0.

You must complete the following tasks to configure the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode parameters:

1.Configure a virtual circuit connection identifier (VCCI).

2.Modify the AAL2 PVC profile table.

Note Modifying the AAL2 PVC profile table is not mandatory.

3.Configure AAL2 PVC parameters.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Configuring a Virtual Circuit Connection Identifier

Complete the following steps to configure a VCCI for the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode:

Step 1 Type the cnfconvcci command, lcn, vcci-num, addr-type, and |fe-addr| argument values, and press Enter to create a new VCCI with an associated logical channel number and a remote ATM address. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???lcn: In the range from 131 to 510.

???vcci-num: In the range from 0 to 65535.

???addr-type (address type):

???1 = Not applicable

???2 = Network service access point (NSAP); a 20-byte hexadecimal address

???3 = E.164 public network addressing; a 1- to 15-byte decimal address

???4 = Gateway ID; a 1- to 64-byte ASCII character address

???5 = Unspecified

???|fe-addr|: The actual remote address

Step 2 Repeat Step 1, as needed, to configure VCCIs on other LCNs.

You have completed configuring VCCIs for the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode. Proceed to the ???Modifying the AAL2 PVC Operating Mode Profile Table??? section on page 4-39.

Modifying the AAL2 PVC Operating Mode Profile Table

A profile table is associated with each AAL2 operating mode. This profile table specifies the encoding format, which tells the card how to interpret the packets.

You can use the dspaal2profile command to see the values for a profile type. Example 4-1 shows the default values for ITU profile type 1.

Example 4-1 Default Values for ITU Profile 1

nodename.1.28.VISM8.a > dspaal2profile 1 1

Table 4-4 describes the fields shown in the display.

Table 4-4 dspaal2profile Field Descriptions

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Table 4-5 AAL2 Operating Mode Profiles (continued)

Complete the following steps to assign a profile preference and to modify the packet period and SID values of the profile table, as necessary.

Note Modifying the AAL2 PVC profile table is not mandatory. Proceed to the ???Configuring AAL2 PVC Parameters??? section on page 4-43 if the values shown in Table 4-5 are correct for your application and configuration requirements.

Step 1 Type the cnfprofparams command, profile-type, profile-num, and profile-pref argument values, and press Enter to specify the preference for a given profile during call setup profile negotiation. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???profile-type:

???1 = ITU

???3 = Custom

???profile-num:

???1 = for the ITU profile

???2 = for the ITU profile

???3 = for the ITU profile

???7 = for the ITU profile

???8 = for the ITU profile

???12 = for the ITU profile

???100 = for custom profiles

???101 = for custom profiles

???110 = for custom profiles

???200 = for custom profiles

???profile-pref:

???0 = No preference; excludes a profile from negotiation

???In the range from 1 (highest) to 9 (lowest)

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Step 2 Type the cnfprofelemvoice command, profile-type, profile-num, codec-type, pvoice-pkt-period, and sid argument values, and press Enter to configure the voice profile element for a specified profile. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???profile-type: Refer to the options listed in Step 1.

???profile-num: Refer to the options listed in Step 1.

???codec-type argument values:

???1 = G.711u

???2 = G.711a

???3 = G.726-32k

???4 = G.729a

???5 = G.729ab

???6 = Clear channel (VAD must be off)

???7 = G.726-16k

???8 = G.726-24k

???9 = G.726-40k

???11 = G.723.1-H

???12 = G.723.1a-H

???13 = G.723.1-L

???14 = G.723.1a-L

???pvoice-pkt-period (defined in milliseconds):

???5

???10

???20

???30

???40

???60

???sid:

???1 = VAD off

???2 = VAD on

???3 = SID generic

???4 = SID 729

???5 = SID 723

Step 3 Type the cnfprofelemvbd command, profile-type, profile-num, codec-type, and vbd-pkt-period argument values, and press Enter to configure the voiceband data element for a specified profile. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???profile-type???Refer to the options listed in Step 1.

???profile-num???Refer to the options listed in Step 1.

???vbd-codec-type???Refer to the options listed in Step 2.

???vbd-pkt-period (defined in milliseconds):

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

???5

???10

???30

Step 4 Type the cnfprofneg command, the codec-priority argument value, and press Enter to specify the priority preference order for the profile lists. Profiles can be from the call agent local connection option (LCO) list, local MIB, or a list received from the remote gateway in the session descriptor protocol (SDP) data. Specify the codec-priority argument value with one of the following:

???1 = LCO list, remote SDP data list, local MIB

???2 = LCO list, local MIB, remote SDP data list

???3 = Remote SDP data list, LCO list, local MIB

???4 = Remote SDP data list, local MIB, LCO list

???5 = Local MIB, LCO list, remote SDP data list

???6 = Local MIB, remote SDP data list, LCO list

You have completed modifying the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode profile table. Proceed to the ???Configuring AAL2 PVC Parameters??? section on page 4-43.

Configuring AAL2 PVC Parameters

Complete the following steps to configure AAL2 PVC parameters:

Step 1 Type the cnfaal2timerparams command, vad-init-timer and cid-fill-timer argument values, and press Enter to configure the holdover and maximum wait time arguments. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???vad-init-timer (defined in milliseconds): In the range from 250 to 65535.

???cid-fill-timer (defined in milliseconds): In the range from 5 to 100.

The vad-init-timer is the holdover time before activating silence suppression. The cid-fill-timer is the maximum waiting time for filling up the cell when the next packet is not ready.

Step 2 Type the cnfaal2transparams command, dtmf-trans, cas-bits-trans, and type-3-red argument values, and press Enter to enable or disable three parameters regarding the transport of CAS signaling.

???dtmf-trans (transportation of DTMF digits):

???1 = On

???2 = Off

???cas-bits-trans (transportation of CAS bits):

???1 = On

???2 = Off

???type-3-red (transportation of AAL2 Type 3 redundancy packets):

???1 = On

???2 = Off

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

You have completed configuring the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode parameters. Proceed to the ???Configuring the Call Agent Interface??? section on page 4-44.

Configuring the Call Agent Interface

Note The CLI call agent configuration commands are used for the VoIP switching and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes only. If your application requires the AAL2 trunking operating mode, do not use the CLI call agent configuration commands described in this section.

VISM can use one to eight call agents to accomplish the following:

???Receive backhauled signaling

???Perform call setup

???Perform call teardown

VISM uses IP connectivity in order to communicate with the call agents (see Figure 4-2).

Figure 4-2 VISM to Call Agent Communication

IP Connectivity

MGX 8850 with VISM

ATM Network

53242

Physical connectivity is through a PVC on an MGX 8000 Series platform PXM card???s OC-3 port, to a router (in the IP Connectivity cloud in Figure 4-2), and then to the call agents.

Logical IP connectivity is performed by resolving domain name and IP address associations. The associations are accomplished in the following ways:

???Statically, by using the CLI call agent configuration commands.

???Dynamically, by using an external domain name server (DNS), which is connected to VISM through IP connectivity.

Figure 4-2 shows a TFTP server which also has an IP connection to VISM.

You must complete the following tasks to configure the call agent interface:

1.Configure domain names and IP addresses.

2.Set up call agents and protocols.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

3.Configure gateway control protocols.

4.Configure ISDN PRI backhaul (optional).

Configuring Domain Names and IP Addresses

Complete the following steps to configure domain names and IP addresses for VISM cards and call agents:

Step 1 Type the cnfvismdn command, the domain-name argument value, and press Enter to specify a domain name for a VISM card. Specify the domain-name argument with the following value:

??? A text string of up to 64 alphanumeric characters; spaces are not allowed. Default = cisco.com.

Note You must use the domain-name argument value you entered for Step 1 when configuring the call agent(s) domain-name argument in Step 3.

Step 2 Type the cnfvismip command, vip-addr, netmask, |bearer-ipaddr|, and |bearer-netmask| argument values, and press Enter to specify an IP address and a subnet mask for your VISM card. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???vip-addr: Type the IP address of your VISM card in dotted decimal format???nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

???netmask (local network mask): Type 255.255.255.248

???|bearer-ipaddr| (optional): Bearer IP address in dotted decimal format: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

???|bearer-netmask| (optional): Bearer IP subnet mask in dotted decimal format: nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn

Step 3 Type the cnftftpdn command, the domain-name argument value, and press Enter to set up the domain names and IP addresses for the call agent(s). The domain name can be a text string of 1 to 64 alphanumeric characters.

Step 4 Repeat Step 1 through Step 3 to configure your remaining VISM cards and call agents.

You have completed configuring domain names and IP addresses for VISM cards and call agents. Proceed to the ???Setting Up Call Agents and Protocols??? section on page 4-45.

Setting Up Call Agents and Protocols

Complete the following steps to set up call agents and media gateway control protocols:

Step 1 Type the adddn command, the domain-num, domain-name, and |resol-type| argument values, and press Enter to add a domain name for a call agent. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???domain-num: A domain number used to identify the domain in the range 1 to 11.

???domain-name (call agent name): A text string of 1 to 64 alphanumeric characters.

???|resol-type| (the optional resolution type to configure for the specified domain name):

???1 = Internal only

???2 = External only

???3 = Internal first

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

??? 4 = External first

Step 2 If you are not using an external DNS to resolve domain names (resol-type = 1 in Step 1), proceed to Step 3. If you are using an external DNS to resolve domain names, proceed to Step 3.

Step 3 Type the adddnip command, resol-num, domain-name, ip-addr, and addr-order argument values, and press Enter to add the IP address for the domain name you added in Step 1. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???resol-num (resolution number of the domain name): In the range from 1 to 88.

???domain-name (call agent name): In the range from 1 to 64 alphanumeric characters.

???ip-addr (IP address which corresponds to domain-name): IP address, which must be in the following format???nnn.nnn.nnn.nnn.

???addr-order (IP address resolution preference order): In the range from 1 (highest) to 8.

Step 4 Type the addmgcgrpentry command, mgc-group, mgc-num, and mgc-priority argument values, and press Enter to add the MGC to a redundancy group. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???mgc-group (call agent redundancy group number): In the range from 1 to 8.

???mgc-num (protocol number): In the range from 1 to 8.

???mgc-priority (preference of the MGC within the group): In the range from 1 (highest) to 8.

Step 5 Type the cnfmgcgrpparam command, mgc-group, state-change-notify, and the optional mgc-priority argument values, and press Enter to change the parameters of the MGC group, if needed.

Note This step is optional; use only if you need to change the MGC group parameters.

Specify the arguments with the following values:

???mgc-group (call agent redundancy group): In the range from 1 to 8.

???state-change-notify (state change message notification):

???1 = Enable (default)

???2 = Disable

???|mgc-priority| (call agent priority): In the range from 0 to 8 (default = 1)

Step 6 Type the addmgcgrpprotocol command, mgc-group and protocol-num argument values, and press Enter to associate a call agent redundancy group with a gateway control protocol. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???mgc-group (call agent redundancy group): In the range from 1 to 8.

???protocol-num (gateway control protocol): In the range from 1 to 8.

Step 7 Repeat Step 1 through Step 6 for each call agent that you need to make active in your application.

You have completed setting up call agents and media gateway control protocols. Proceed to the ???Configuring Gateway Control Protocols??? section on page 4-47, if necessary.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Gateway Control Protocols

Complete the following steps to configure gateway control protocols.

Note Use the configure gateway control CLI commands in this section only if you need to configure argument values for the commands that are different than the default argument values.

Step 1 Type the cnfxgcppeer command, mgc-num, protocol-num, and remote-udp-pnum, and press Enter to configure a port number for a particular call agent and protocol. The port is used to send gateway-initiated messages to the call agent. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???mgc-num: In the range 1 to 8.

???protocol-num: A protocol number which is displayed by using the dspmgcgrpprotocols command.

???remote-udp-pnum: The remote UDP port number used for MGCP/SGCP protocol communication with the call agent.

Step 2 Type the cnfxgcpmwd command, max-wait-delay argument value, and press Enter to specify the maximum waiting time before a Restart in Progress (RSIP) message is sent to the call agent. Specify the max-wait-delay argument value as follows:

???max-wait-delay (maximum wait time; defined in milliseconds): In the range from 0 to 600000; (default = 10000; 10 seconds)

Note The max-wait-delay argument value sets the maximum wait time for the entire VISM card, not for a particular call agent.

Step 3 Type the cnfxgcpretry command, min-vtoca-tout, vtoca-retrans-num, and |max-vtoca-tout| argument values, and press Enter to specify the VISM minimum and maximum wait time, and number of retries, for a call agent message acknowledgment. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???min-vtoca-tout (defined in milliseconds): In the range from 1 to 100000; (default = 500)

???vtoca-retrans-num:

???Default = 3

???|max-vtoca-tout|: In the range from 0 to 100000.

Step 4 Type the cnfxgcpbt command, network-type, vc-type, and aal-conn-type argument values, and press Enter to specify the type of bearer channel VISM uses, if one is not specified by the call agent in protocol local connection options. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???network-type:

???1 = IP

???2 = ATM

???vc-type:

???1 = PVC

???2 = SVC

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

???aal-conn-type:

???1 = AAL1

???2 = AAL2

???3 = Not applicable

Note You must type 3 for the aal-conn-type argument if the network-type argument = 1.

Step 5 Type the addxgcppersistevt command, event-num and pkg-event argument values, and press Enter to designate xGCP events as persistent.

Note Do not complete this step if persistent events are not required for your application.

Specify the arguments with the following values:

???event-num: In the range from 1 to 64.

???pkg-event:

???r/co3 = VISM initiated AAL2 type 3 packet (CO3) network continuity test

???r/co4 = Network continuity test detect

???g/ft = Fax tone

???g/mt = Modem tone

???g/vbd = Voiceband data

???g/vbdt = Voiceband data termination

???l/hu, bl/hu = On hook

???l/hd, blhd = Off hook

???ms/ans, dt/ans, md/ans, mo/ans = Answer

???ms/sup, dt/sup, md/sup = Setup

???ms/rel, dt/rel, md/rel, mo/rel = Release

???ms/rtc, dt/rlc, md/rlc, mo/rlc = Release complete

???ms/res, dt/res, md/res = Resume

???ms/sus, dt/sus, md/sus = Suspend

???md/awk = Acknowledgment wink

???mo/rbz = Reverse make busy

Step 6 Type the cnfsrcppeer command, peer-num and udp-port-num argument values, and press Enter to specify the SRCP parameters for communication between VISM and the call agent. Specify the arguments from the following values:

???peer-num: The peer (call agent) identification number, as displayed in the dspsrcppeers command list; in the range from 1 to 8.

???udp-port-num: In the range from 1025 to 65535

Note If you do not execute this command, the default MGCP/SGCP port number = 2428.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Step 7 Type the cnfsrcppeergrpparam command, the mgc-group, hbeat-int, and max-udp-size argument values, and press Enter to configure the SRCP heartbeat interval and maximum UDP size for a specified call agent redundancy group. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???mgc-group (call agent redundancy group): In the range from 1 to 8

???hbeat-int (interval between heartbeats; defined in milliseconds):

???0

???In the range from 100 to 65535.

???max-udp-size (maximum allowable UDP size): In the range from 4095 to 65535.

Step 8 Type the cnfsrcpretry command, srcp-min-tout, max-srcp-retries, and srcp-max-tout argument values, and press Enter to configure the minimum and maximum timeout periods, and retry attempts, for transmitting SRCP commands to the call agent. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???srcp-min-tout (defined in milliseconds): In the range from 1 to 10000 (default = 500).

???max-srcp-retries: In the range from 1 to 10.

???srcp-max-tout: In the range from 1 to 10000 (default = 500).

Step 9 Type the cnfco4timer command, a co4-timeout argument value, and press Enter to configure CO4 bearer continuity. Specify the argument with the following value:

??? co4-timeout (defined in milliseconds): In the range from 50 to 10000 (default = 1000).

You have completed configuring gateway control protocols. Proceed to the ???Configuring ISDN PRI Backhaul??? section on page 4-49 if necessary.

Configuring ISDN PRI Backhaul

ISDN PRI backhaul configuration consists of setting up RUDP session structures:

???Session sets

???Session groups

???Sessions

A session group applies to a specified call agent and allows automatic switching to another session in the group if an active session fails. You can configure individual sessions when you have completed setting up the session sets and session groups. Refer to Chapter 3, ???VISM Functional Description,??? for more information on session structures.

Note Use the commands in this section only if backhauling of ISDN PRI signaling to the call agent is required for your application.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Complete the following steps to configure ISDN PRI backhaul:

Step 1 Type the addsesset command, set-num and fault-tol-enable argument values, and press Enter to create a session set. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???set-num: In the range from 1 to 16

???fault-tol-enable:

???1 = Yes

???2 = No

Step 2 Type the addsesgrp command, group-num, set-num, and mgc-name argument values, and press Enter to create a session group for a session set and a call agent. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???group-num: In the range from 1 to 16

???set-num: In the range from 1 to 8

???mgc-name: A text string of up to 64 alphanumeric characters

Step 3 Type the addses command, session-num, group-num, priority, local-port-num, and remote-port-num argument values, and press Enter to create an ISDN PRI backhaul RUDP session within a specified group. Specify the arguments from the following values:

???session-num: In the range from 1 to 64

???group-num: In the range from 1 to 16

???priority: In the range from 1 (highest) to 4 (lowest)

???local-port-num: The VISM port number you want to use for the session

???remote-port-num: The call agent (remote) port number you want to use for the session

Note The following session configuration commands apply to a single session which is identified by the first argument, the session-num.

Step 4 Type the cnfsesack command, session-num, ack-timeout, and max-acks argument values, and press Enter to change the timeout period for sending out an acknowledgment and the maximum number of acknowledgments that can accumulated before sending them. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???session-num: In the range from 1 to 64

???ack-timeout (defined in milliseconds): In the range from 100 to 65535

???max-acks: In the range from 0 to 255

Step 5 Type the cnfsesmaxreset command, session-num and max-resets argument values, and press Enter to configure the maximum number of resets that VISM performs before a connection is reset. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???session-num: Type the value entered for the session-num argument in Step 4.

???max-resets: In the range from 0 to 255

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring VISM Features

Step 6 Type the cnfsesmaxseg command, session-num and seg-size argument values, and press Enter to configure the maximum segment size VISM can receive after sending a SYN message. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???session-num: Type the value entered for the session-num argument in Step 4.

???seg-size (defined in octets): In the range from 30 to 65535

Step 7 Type the cnfsesmaxwindow command, session-num and window-size argument values, and press Enter to configure the maximum number of segments that can be sent without getting an acknowledgment for a specific RUDP session. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???session-num: Type the value entered for the session-num argument in Step 4.

???window-size: In the range from 1 to 64

Step 8 Type the cnfsesnullsegtmout command, session-num and null-seg-tout argument values, and press Enter to configure the amount of idle time before sending a null segment. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???session-num: Type the value entered for the session-num argument in Step 4.

???null-seg-tout (defined in milliseconds): In the range from 0 to 65535

Step 9 Type the cnfsesoutofseq command, session-num and max-seq-pkts argument values, and press Enter to configure the maximum number of out-of-sequence packets that will be accumulated before sending an EACK packet. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???session-num: Type the value entered for the session-num argument in Step 4.

???max-seq-pkts: In the range from 0 to 255.

Note If you specify 0 for the max-seq-pkts argument, a DACK message is sent immediately upon receiving an out-of-sequence packet.

Step 10 Type the cnfsesport command, session-num, local-port-num, and remote-port-num argument values, and press Enter to configure the local (VISM end) and remote (call agent end) port numbers for a session number. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???session-num: Type the value entered for the session-num argument in Step 4.

???local-port-num: In the range from 1124 to 65535

???remote-port-num: In the range from 1124 to 65535

This command allows the user to configure the local and remote port numbers.

Step 11 Type the cnfsesretrans command, session-num, unack-timeout, and max-ses-retrans argument values, and press Enter to configure the retransmission of unacknowledged packet timeout value and the maximum number of consecutive retransmission attempts before the connection is considered failed. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???session-num: Type the value entered for the session-num argument in Step 4.

???unack-timeout (in milliseconds): In the range from 100 to 65535

???max-ses-retrans: In the range from 0 to 255

Step 12 Type the cnfsesstatetmout command, session-num and tstate-tout argument values, and press Enter to configure the amount of time VISM waits for the transfer state before executing an auto reset. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???session-num: Type the value entered for the session-num argument in Step 4.

???tstate-tout (in milliseconds): In the range from 0 to 65535

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

Step 13 Type the cnfsessyncatmps command, session-num and max-sync-attempts argument values, and press Enter to configure the maximum number of attempts to synchronize VISM with the call agent. Specify the arguments with the following values:

???session-num: Type the value entered for the session-num argument in Step 4.

???max-sync-attempts: In the range from 1 to 32

Step 14 Repeat Step 4 through Step 13 for all additional session numbers, as required for your application.

You have completed configuring ISDN PRI backhaul.

The basic configuration of your VISM cards is complete. Use the configuration instructions in this chapter to reconfigure VISM for your application needs as they change. Use the commands described in Chapter 5, ???CLI Commands,??? to further configure your VISM cards, if necessary.

Configuring Additional VISM Features

The following features are available for users of VISM 3.0 and higher:

???Support for the MGCP 0.1 subset of the MGCP 1.0 protocol

Note The restart method (RM) is not defined as part of the MGCP 0.1 subset, and is not supported.

???Verified MGCP 0.1 protocol compliance

???PBX CAS event delivery to a call agent using MGCP 0.1:

???DTMF: Wink and ground start

???MF: Wink

???TFTP download of CAS variant state machine

Note RFC 3064 CAS packages???BL, MS, and DT???are not supported.

???Interoperability enhancements:

???Configurable codec strings (IANA naming conventions as well as customized ones)

???Codec negotiation with configurable preference order

???Exponential backoff for:

???XGCP retry timers

???SRCP retry timers

???Configurable per CAS variant

???DTMF Relay using Cisco-rtp (FRF-11 Annex A based)

???Enhancement to Fax/modem up-speed/pass-through procedures:

???Configurable CAC failure and carrier loss policies

???Up-speed to clear channel

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

???Added support for G.726: 16, 24, 32, and 40 kbps, with packetization periods ranging from 10 to 40 ms

???Support for VBR-rt (variable bit rate real time) and VBR-nrt (non real time) ATM traffic classes, including traffic shaping to the relevant traffic descriptors

???Configurable VAD model parameter for traffic engineering

???In E1 applications, support for 31 DS0 per span and a total of 248 channels per card

???Tested CRTP support through RPM for voice and voice band data calls

???Verified bearer interoperability with 3810

???Switched PVCs using SGCP 1.5:

???SDP and SGCP extensions allowing xGCP call agent control of AAL2 bearers

???Support of SGCP 1.5 digit maps and error codes

???Support for card level coexistence of switched AAL2 mode (under Call Agent control) and trunked AAL2 mode on PVCs, on an endpoint (DS0) basis

???PBX CAS event delivery to a Call Agent using SGCP 1.5:

???DTMF: Wink and ground start

???MF: Wink

???TFTP download of CAS variant state machine

???Interoperability and configuration enhancements:

???Configurable codec strings (IANA naming conventions as well as customized ones)

???Profile negotiation and configurable preference order

???Configurable voice and VBD (for example, up-speed codec) per profile

???Added support for custom profile 110 and 200 (clear channel), ITU profiles 3 and 8

???User-configurable AAL2 Silence Indicator Description (SID) for all profiles

???Type 3 Packet Support for proxy ringback (xrbk), packet side bearer continuity check (co3/co4 COT), and midcall DTMF relay

???Connection admission control (CAC) enhancements:

???Patented CAC method factoring in VAD and subcell multiplexing savings

???Configurable VAD model parameter for traffic engineering

???Configurable AAL2 cell fill timer

???AAL2 alarm enhancements: per span, VC, and per channel (CID) conditioning

???Display, clear, and reset AAL2 performance related counters

???In E1 AAL2 trunking applications, support for 31 DS0 per span and a total of 248 channels per card

???Verified bearer interoperability with 3810 and third-party vendors

???Infrastructure work and enhanced support for three operating modes: VoIP switching, AAL2 trunking, and switched AAL2 PVC

???Graceful upgrade VISM 2.0 and 2.0(1) to VISM 2.1(0)

???The ability to enable or disable the call agent protocol SDP OST feature in the event the peer gateway may or may not support SDP OST. This feature allows interoperability with the Cisco AS5300 Universal Access Server and other equipment

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

???The ability for VISM to perform as either the network or user side of the LAPD protocol for PRI backhaul

???CCS/PRI backhaul between VISM and a call agent in VoIP mode

???Support VoIP G.729ab compression

???Idle channel suppression

???Support for setting the IP precedence bit

???Support for Q.50 CAS signaling variant

???Negotiable packetization period

???AAL2 subcell multiplexing

???E1 back card support in AAL2 trunking mode

???E1 back card support (VoIP mode only)

???Provides 8 standard T1 interfaces with B8ZS, AMI and HDB3 line coding

???Support for voice over ATM using AAL2 cells (multiplexing only, no LLC/SNAP encapsulation.

???VoIP using AAL5 cells to RFC 1889

???Support for both PCM a-law and u-law

???Programmable 24, 32, 48, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128 ms near end echo cancellation

???Voice compression to G.711 and G.726-32k standards

???Nx64 clear channel (N = 1 only) support

???Voice activity detection (VAD) and comfort noise generation (CNG) using variable threshold energy (Cisco proprietary)

???Support for call agent Simple Gateway Control Protocol (SGCP) Version 1.0, SGCP 1.1+, and Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) 0.1

???Support for CCS signaling transport across an AAL5 trunk

???Support for Fax and modem VoIP bearer transmissions

???Support for dual (redundant) virtual circuits across the packet network

???Support for full continuity testing (COT). Supports origination and terminating loopback and transponder COT towards the packet bearer and the TDM sides

???Support for loop timing, payload and line loopbacks

???1:N cold redundancy using SRM-3T3 capabilities (bulk mode support for T1 lines only) for switched calls

???1:N hot redundancy for trunking applications only

???Courtesy downing of ongoing voice calls when the VISM is taken out of service for maintenance or other reasons

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

Mid-Call DTMF

The mid-call dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) feature enables the collection and notification of digits to the call agent following a call setup for an endpoint, and supports the outpulsing of DTMF digits at a call agent???s request. This feature is used for services that require two stage dialing, such as calling card applications.

Mid-call DTMF is supported for all the CAS variants, for DTMF mode only.

Configurable Jitter Buffer

The configurable jitter buffer feature provides configuration of jitter buffer mode and initial delay time on a codec basis. Fax, modem, and CCD calls have less packet loss with the addition of this feature.

Adjustable Gain

The adjustable gain feature allows you to adjust gain on a DS0 channel basis for both input and output signals. The adjustable gain can be set when there is active call going on at the DS0 channel, and at both bounded non-active and unbounded endpoints.

Adjustable Music On-Hold Threshold

The adjustable music on-hold threshold feature allows you to adjust the dB level, on a DS0 basis, of when DSPs interpret TDM side silence or voice.

CALEA

The Commission on Accreditation for Law Enforcement Act (CALEA) feature, used with VoIP applications, provides data (eavesdropping) about an intercepted subject (the user/subscriber) in two forms for both the receive and transmit directions:

???Call identifying data

???Call content data

The call identifying data (called number) is provided by call agents. The call content data (voice) is provided by the edge/access routers (7200, for example) and trunking gateways (MGX 8000 series platforms) in combination with VISM cards.

The VISM CALEA implementation supports the CALEA law intercept confirmation interface.

MGC Redundancy

The media gateway controller (MGC) redundancy feature provides redundancy for call agents on VI SM cards. You can associate one or more call agents as members of a redundancy group.

An MGC redundancy group consists of one or more MGCs (which are identified by their domain name). An MGC can be part of one redundancy group, although there can be multiple MGCs per redundancy group. At any given time, only one MGC in the redundant group is active.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

This feature requires you to add more than one domain name and configure these as redundant call agents or the same logical MGC. Only the IP addresses corresponding to each physical entity are returned by the DNS server. In order to allow VISMs to traverse all the IP addresses, you must identify these physical entities as redundant call agents.

External DNS

The external domain name server (DNS) feature allows VISM to use an external DNS to resolve the IP address you configure. The domain names can be MGCs, call agents, or trivial file transfer protocol (TFTP) servers used for CAS file downloads. Resolution of IP addresses can be configured with the following methods:

???Internal static tables only

???External DNS only

???External DNS, followed by the internal static tables if the external DNS method fails

???Internal static tables, followed by the external DNS if the internal static table method fails

2 IP Address Support

The 2 IP address allows you to add separate IP addresses for the control and data paths for VISM. This feature removes the restriction of control and data traffic going to two different domains.

VoIP Trunking

The Voice over IP (VoIP) trunking feature allows the VISM to connect to the PBX, or central office digital systems, using T1/E1 digital interfaces and converts the TDM bit stream into RTP packets, after ECAN and compression, and transports it over the IP network.

No call agent is required for setting up and tearing down calls. You must configure the DS0 circuits. The connection between VISM and the first router will be ATM after which it will be IP only. VISM and the router can have one or multiple PVCs to transport the data. You have the option to configure PVC for bearer or control. If the PVC is configured as bearer and no control PVC exists, then PRI signal traffic and bearer traffic will go through this PVC. If you configure separate PVCs for control and bearer, PRI signaling will go through control traffic only. You can modify some of the connection parameters after it is added.

CAS is transported to the far end using a Cisco proprietary format (not NSEs). PRI is transported over RUDP to the far end once the trunk is provisioned between the originating and terminating VISM.

PRI transport is handled in a way identical to PRI backhaul except that the PRI traffic is sent to remote gateway instead of a call agent. You can configure one line for PRI trunking and another line for PRI backhauling.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

You must provision the LAPD trunk when using this feature. You must configure a line number, remote gateway IP address, local UDP port, and remote gateway UDP port, and then open a trunk. You must then configure the D-channel as a trunk or backhaul:

???To configure the D channel as trunk, use the addlapdtrunk command prior to the addlapd command. If the addlapd command has been previously executed for that line, the command is rejected.

Note Two D channels on one line are not supported.

???To configure the D channel as backhaul, use the addses command prior to the addlapd command. If you do not configure either trunk or session, the addlapd command is rejected.

T.38 Fax Relay

The ITU T.38 recommendation for fax relay feature assists fax transmission over IP networks. You must configure T.38 parameters???fax rate, information field size, data packet size, data redundancy, and NSF values???to use this feature.

Note You must use codec template 3 with the T.38 fax relay feature enabled. The T.38 feature supports 120 DS0s when enabled.

CAS Feature Enhancements

VISM Release 2.2 allows you to configure different CAS packages on different endpoints. The following CAS feature enhancements are also added to this release.

Programmable Tone Plans

This enhancement provides you the ability to provision a tone plan in a CAS independent scenario so that any inband call progress tone can be played on any endpoint (CAS, CCS, or clear channel) when signaled by the call agent.

VISM Release 3.0 contains the built-in (preconfigured) version 1 tone plans shown in Table 4-6, which you cannot modify or remove from the system.

Table 4-6 VISM 3.0 Built-in (Preconfigured) Tone Plans

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

Table 4-6 VISM 3.0 Built-in (Preconfigured) Tone Plans (continued)

1. ITU = International Telecommunications Union (formerly CCITT).

VISM Release 3.0 allows you to configure provisional tone plans if the built-in tone plans do not meet your application needs. Provisional tone plans are created by assigning new region/country, version, and file names, and configuring the following call progress tones:

???Ringback

???Busy

???Reorder/Congestion

???Dial

???Stutter dial

???Offhook alert/warning

Loop Start, DID, and Delay Dial

The exchange side (FXO) of the loop start protocol is implemented with this release. VISM can accept calls from, and terminate calls to, loop start PBXs. When a PBX sends a subscriber call to the gateway, it sends the loop close signal through the CAS signaling channel. To hang up, it sends the loop-open signal.

Direct inward dial enables a caller outside a company to call internal extensions without having to go through an operator or an attendant. VISM has this ability???it outpulses the digit stream handed down by the call agent.

Dial delay is an E&M signaling protocol similar to wink start. The originating VISM, on receiving a seize (AB=11) from the PBX, responds by sending the delay-dial (AB=11) signal back to the PBX. When the originating VISM is ready to collect the digits, it sends start-dial (AB=00) signal. This operation is symmetric. So the terminating VISM, on seizing a trunk, should receive AB=11 (as an acknowledgment that the trunk is operational). Subsequently when it receives the start signal (AB=00) from the connected PBX, it should outpulse the digits. The rest of the operation is similar to wink-start.

FGD

FGD enables long distance calls through one of the following methods:

???Preselected access carrier (AC) by dialing 1 + area code + number.

???Selecting the AC on a per call basis by dialing 101xxxx before the area code and phone number to within a local exchange carrier???s (LEC) network in North America.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

FGD supports the following protocols:

???Terminating Protocol

???Equal Access North American (EANA)

???Operator Services (OS)

Configure Flash Hook and Glare Condition Attributes

You can configure both flash hook and glare condition attributes with VISM Release 2.2. Flash hook configuration allows you to modify the duration of a flash hook. Duration shorter or longer than that configured are interpreted as incoming calls and disconnects. Glare condition attribute configuration allows you to control the CAS direction???incoming, outgoing, or bidirectional???and the glare handling policy???controlling or releasing.

Configure ANI and DNIS Digit Order

You can configure the order in which a call agent sends automatic number identification (ANI) digits???the caller???s number???and dial number identification service (DNIS) digits???the called number???to VISM during an outgoing Feature Group D (FGD) call for the endpoints of a specified VISM card line.

RFC 3064 Package Support

This release fully supports the following packages from RFC 3064:

???MS???MF single stage dialing trunks. This includes wink start and immediate start PBX DID/DOD trunks as well as basic R1 and FGD Terminating protocol.

???DT???Immediate start and basic DTMF and dial-pulse trunks.

???MD???North American MF FGD EANA and EAIN, which allows VISM to be at the end office, the carrier, or the tandem side of the circuit.

???MO???FGD Operator Services Signaling, outgoing trunks only.

???BL???DTMF and dial pulse (DP) basic PBX trunks.

RFC 2833 Support

Support for RFC 2833 enables VISM to support DTMF relay using named telephony events (NTEs), named signaling event (NSE) based relay, and Cisco-RTP based relay. For all other tones, VISM uses NSEs.

VISM Network Continuity Test

You can configure VISM network continuity testing with VISM Release 2.2(0).

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

Configure PVC OAM Cell Parameters

This feature allows you to configure the transmitted and received permanent virtual circuit (PVC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) cell parameters???cell gap, recovery cell count, and unacknowledged cell count.

PXM1E and PXM45 Card-Only Features

Software Release 3.0(0) for VISM/VISM-PR introduces a new card???VISM-PR. You can use the VISM-PR card in combination with any of the following MGX 8000 Series switch Processor Module cards:

???PXM1

???PXM1E

???PXM45

Table 4-7 describes the configuration requirements for VISM/VISM-PR in combination with the MGX 8000 Series switches and supported processor modules.

Table 4-7 VISM/VISM-PR and MGX 8000 Series Switch Support

Refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 Hardware Installation Guide, Release 3 for information on installing and maintaining the PXM1, PXM1E, and PXM45 cards.

Note You cannot use the VISM card in combination with either the PXM1E or PXM45 card.

The VISM-PR card supports 144 channels when used with the G.723.1 codec. The VISM card does not support the G.723.1 codec.

The following software Release 3.0(0) for VISM/VISM-PR features require either the PXM1E or PXM45 card and are not supported if you are using PXM1 cards in your MGX 8000 Series switch chassis:

???Call Agent-Controlled VoATM AAL1 and AAL2 SVC

???AAL1 SVC-Based TDM Hairpinning

???Expanded Clock Source Selection

Note Clock source configuration support and procedures are not changed from previous releases of software if you are using a PXM1 card in your MGX 8000 Series switch chassis.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

???Private Network-to-Network Interface Priority Routing

???Additional SPVC Connection Management Capabilities

Call Agent-Controlled VoATM AAL1 and AAL2 SVC

The following operating modes are supported with software Release 3.0(0) for VISM/VISM-PR:

???VoAAL1 switched virtual circuit (SVC), supported with the G.711 codec and clear channel.

Note VAD is not supported in combination with AAL1 SVCs.

???VoAAL2 SVC, supported with the G.711, G.726, G.729a, G.729ab, and G.723 codecs and ITU profiles 1, 2, 3, 7, 8, and custom profiles 100, 101, 110, and 200.

Note CAS is not supported in combination with switched virtual circuits.

Use the cnfvismmode command to configure VISM operating modes.

Note This feature requires you to use a PXM1E or PXM45 in your MGX 8000 Series switch chassis.

AAL1 SVC-Based TDM Hairpinning

VoAAL1 switched virtual circuit (SVC) operating mode is supported with the G.711 codec and clear channel. The AAL1 SVC operating mode supports TDM hairpinning.

Note VAD is not supported in combination with AAL1 SVCs. CAS is not supported in combination with SVCs

Use the cnfvismmode command to configure VISM operating modes.

Note This feature requires you to use a PXM1E or PXM45 in your MGX 8000 Series switch chassis.

High Complexity Codec Support for VISM-PR???G.723.1

The VISM-PR card supports high complexity codec G.723.1 in template number 4. Template number 4 supports all the codecs in template number 3 and the following:

???G.723.1 high rate (6.3Kbps)???G.723.1-H

???G.723.1 high rate with VAD???G.723.1a-H

???G.723.1 low rate (5.3Kbps)???G.723.1-L

???G.723.1 low rate with VAD???G.723.1a-L

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

The G.723.1 codec, used in combination with the VISM-PR card, supports 144 channels. Refer to Table 4-3 for a description of VISM-PR DS0 density when the cards are used in combination with supported codecs.

Several CLI commands have been modified to allow you to use the G.723.1 codec and template number 4.

Note The G.723.1 codecs are not supported for VISM cards.

Announcement File System

This release allows VISM to play prerecorded local announcements in switched VoIP connections. Under the control of a call agent, announcements can be played toward any IP endpoint or toward any VISM endpoint.

Up to 125 different announcements may be cached on the VISM card for immediate playout. A persistent announcement storage area exists in the packet network. Announcements are downloaded on demand from the announcement storage area and remain on the VISM card until they have reached expiry or are replaced. If the 125 announcement maximum is reached, subsequent requests for announcements not on the VISM card result in the replacement of ???cached??? announcements.

Announcements can be played over established connections in any VISM supported codec, but they must exist on the announcement file server in the desired encoding.

Note You must play announcements in the exact codec in which they have been recorded.

VISM announcements require the support of the MGCP 0.1/1.0 call agent.

Announcement Timeouts

VISM uses a provisionable timeout value of 5 seconds. If an announcement cannot start playing within the timeout value of receiving the request, the action is canceled and, if requested by the call agent, an ???of??? event is reported. If the call agent specifies a timeout value in the request, this value will be ignored.

Announcement Direction

Announcements can be played toward the packet network or toward the TDM network (not both). The direction is determined by the notation of the MGCP S: line. Announcement direction examples:

S: a/ann(all-lines-busy.au)

Explanation Indicates that all-lines-busy.au is to be played toward the TDM network.

S:a/ann@connid(all-lines-busy.au)

Explanation Indicates that all-lines-busy.au is to be played toward the packet network.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

Broadcast Announcements

VISM supports announcement requests for a single endpoint or connection. The request may only specify a single announcement to be played on a single endpoint in a single direction. Broadcast announcements are not supported.

Multiple Announcement Requests for the Same Endpoint

If an announcement is being played on an endpoint (in one direction) and a subsequent announcement request is received for the same endpoint (in the same direction), the playing announcement will continue and the new announcement request is ignored.

If an announcement is being played on an endpoint (in one direction) and a subsequent announcement request is received for the same endpoint (in the other direction), the playing announcement is stopped and the new announcement is then played. Events are not generated for the stopped announcement.

Announcement File Server

Announcements are contained in an announcement file server, which resides on an IP network reachable from the VISM using Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP).

Announcement File Server Name

You can configure the announcement file server node name on the VISM the same way that you configure a node name for the TFTP server.

Announcement File Server Directory Structure

You may use any directory or path on the file server as the main directory for storing announcement files. If you do not provision an announcement path prefix on VISM, the main announcement file directory is the default TFTP directory on the server. If a path prefix is provisioned, this prefix is used as the main announcement directory. If the prefix is not absolute (does not begin with a forward slash (/)), the prefix is relative to the default TFTP directory.

You can configure codec subdirectories under the main announcement directory on the announcement file server. A codec subdirectory exists for each codec used for announcement files.The subdirectories may be one or more of the following:

???g711u/

???g711a/

???g726_32k/

???g726_24k/

???g726_16k/

???g729_a/

???g7231_high_rate/

???g7231_a_high_rate/

???g7231_low_rate/

???g7231_a_low_rate/

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

When the call agent requests that an announcement is to be played toward the TDM network on an unconnected endpoint, you can specify the codec to be used.

Another level of directories might be configured to group announcement files by language. These directories would be specified by the call agent (or when provisioning the VISM) as part of the announcement file name. For example, the call agent might specify the announcement file name to be english/ann1.au. If the file was encoded in G.729a and the prefix was /tftpboot, the file would reside at /tftpboot/g729_a/english/ann1.au.

VISM Announcement Cache Management

VISM maintains an announcement cache in resident memory. When an announcement is requested to be played, it is retrieved from the announcement file server and placed in the on-board announcement cache. Subsequent requests for the same announcement do not require retrieval of the announcement file from the announcement file server.

Note An announcement in one encoding is a different file than the same announcement in a different encoding.

Announcement Expiry

You can provision an announcement aging policy. Once an announcement has aged (reached expiry) in the on-board cache, it is refreshed???retrieved again from the announcement file server. This provides you with the means to balance the cost of file server access with the time before an announcement changed on the file server is propagated to the VISM. In addition, you can delete dynamic files from the announcement cache at any time.

Permanent Announcements

You can provision permanent announcements for VISM. A permanent announcement is retrieved from the announcement file server and installed permanently in the VISM announcement file cache. Permanent announcements are excluded from aging (and being automatically refreshed) and excluded from being replaced if the announcement cache becomes full. Permanent announcements can only be removed from the cache explicitly by using a CLI command. If VISM is reset or fails over to a standby card, permanent announcements are retrieved as soon as the card becomes active. The announcement encoding must be specified when provisioning or deleting permanent announcements.

Use the CLI commands in Table 4-8 to configure the announcement file system feature.

Table 4-8 Announcement File System Feature CLI Commands

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

Table 4-8 Announcement File System Feature CLI Commands (continued)

Call Agent-Controlled T.38 Fax

The call agent-controlled T.38 fax feature is an additional operational mode for MGCP 1.0 to request T.38. This addition allows VISM to interoperate with H.323 and non-Cisco gateways, and is supported for VoIP calls. This feature is activated based on the fax tone and signaling carried with the call agent. The modified cnft38fxlco command allows you to configure the local connection option fax preamble response to off. All previous options are valid.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

Additional Support for MGCP 1.0

This release expands the support for the Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) 1.0, which was introduced in VISM 2.2. The following are implemented for the MGCP 1.0 feature support:

???Restart in Progress command disconnect procedure wait delay timer value specification for the following:

???Initial

???Minimum

???Maximum

???Call agent redundancy group protocol configuration for the following:

???Quarantine handling method for persistent events

???Default quarantine handling method for each protocol

???Ability to keep events from previous lists, until explicitly requested to be removed

???Ability to send provisional responses

???Ability to send response acknowledgments

???Ability to provide a disconnect method

???Ability to cancel previously issued graceful restart commands

Use the CLI commands in Table 4-9 to configure the MGCP 1.0 feature.

Table 4-9 MGCP 1.0 Feature CLI Commands

RSVP-Based Admission Control

Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)-based admission control signaling with MGCP is supported, which allows for quality VoIP connections. For the connections, the RSVP-MGCP interaction results in the following:

???Establish or originate unidirectional resource reservation for sending voice packets for connections established and controlled by MGCP.

???Accept unidirectional resource reservations for receiving voice packets from MGCP controlled connections.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

???Tear down originated or established unidirectional resource reservations.

???Tear down accepted resource reservations.

Note VISM supports RSVP in the VoIP switching operating mode only, with a 5 calls per second limitation; RSVP is not supported in the VoIP trunking operating mode.

In previous releases of VISM software, the following connection data is returned in response to the call agent initiated DLCX, and gateway initiated DLCX or AUCX commands:

???Number of packets sent

???Number of octets sent

???Number of packets received

???Number of octets received

VISM Release 3.0(0) provides the following additional connection data:

???Number of packets lost

???Inter-arrival jitter???If a DSP is configured to operate in the adaptive jitter buffer mode, the jitter data provided indicates the delay that the jitter-algorithm is adapted to. If a DSP is configured to operate in the fixed jitter buffer mode, the jitter data provided indicates the value that was configured when the channel was opened.

Note For adaptive mode you can use the value to indicate that the configured initial delay value is too low or too high, since the algorithm adapts according to the actual network jitter.

???Average transmission delay (latency)

Use the commands in Table 4-10 to configure the RSVP-based admission control feature.

Table 4-10 RSVP-Based Admission Control Feature CLI Commands

Clock Slip Counters

The clock counter information feature allows you to clear the current frame slip counters for a specified VISM or VISM-PR card line and display the current frame slip counters for a specified VISM or VISM-PR card line. Use the new clrslipcnt and dspslipcnt to use this feature.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

RTP Connection Statistics

Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) connection statistics are collected for individual endpoints and sent to the call agent. Use the new dsprtpconnstat command to display collected RTP connection statistics.

Jitter delay data collection at call completion is on a per call basis. Jitter delay data and number of packets sent and received, and number of octets sent and received, are reported to the call agent through MGCP.

CAS Immediate Start and Ground Start Glare Handling

CAS Immediate Start???The CAS variants immediate start and immediate start, multifrequency are supported. Use the addcasvar command to configure CAS variants.

Note The immediate start protocol does not define glare handling procedures???do not use the immediate start protocol on incoming or outgoing endpoints only. Endpoints are added as bidirectional by default. To make them incoming or outgoing, use the cnfcasglarepolicy command. If the endpoints are left as bidirectional, configured for immediate start operation, and glare occurs, the results may be unpredictable.

Ground Start Glare Handling???This release supports CAS glare condition handling according to RFC 3064. The VISM sends a NACK message in response to the call agent???s request for ringing with error code 401 (off hook) in the event of a glare condition.

On receiving the request for ringing from call control, CAS transmits a seize signal to the PBX and starts the glare timer, returning a provisional response code to call control indicating that CAS is still processing the request. If the timer expires (normal case) or an incoming seizure is observed on the endpoint, CAS generates an asynchronous response code to call control that is comparable to an MGCP response code of 200 or 401, respectively.

Grooming for Local Traffic

VISM supports the call agent controlled grooming feature. Grooming allows VISM to avoid routing local traffic through the IP network. Voice packets from a local connection are switched locally in the ATM switch.

A call agent determines if a call needs to be setup as local. To set up a local call, the call agent selects an ATM connection over a VoIP connection. The VISM card, as a gateway, receives the connection request message from the call agent for an ATM connection. The VISM card allows VoIP calls and VoAAL1 SVC calls to coexist and allows provisioning of VoIP and ATM simultaneously.

To achieve this, VISM uses VoIP and Switched ATM AAL1 SVC as local switching mode. VISM receives an ATM AAL1 SVC call setup request from the call agent for local calls.

You must use the cnfvismmode command and select the VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating mode to use the grooming feature. Using this mode does not change any other settings on your card. The type of connection for a call is determined by the connection request (CRCX) from the call agent or by the bearer type configuration.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

MGX 8000 Series Implementation Enhancements

The following enhancements are supported with this release to you with additional implementation of your MGX 8000 Series switch:

???Additional VBR Enhancements

???Expanded Clock Source Selection

???Private Network-to-Network Interface Priority Routing

???Additional SPVC Connection Management Capabilities

???192 T1/248 E1 DS0 Support with High Complexity Codecs on VISM-PR

???Channel Alarm Enhancement

???VISM TDM Line Statistics Collection

Additional VBR Enhancements

Setting connections between a VISM-PR card and a RPM-PR card in your MGX 8000 Series switch chassis requires you to use the new VBR (NRT) 3 connection type. Use the modified addcon or cnfcon commands to configure this connection type. In addition, the following new connection service types can be configured with the modified commands in this release:

???VBR (RT) 2

???VBR (RT) 3

???VBR (NRT) 2

Expanded Clock Source Selection

This release supports an expanded clock source selection, which allows you to configure any VISM-PR card line as the clock source. You cannot delete a VISM-PR line that is configured as the clock source; you must configure a different line as the clock source and then you can delete the original clock source line. The previously released CLI commands allow you to use this feature.

Note This feature requires you to use a PXM1E or PXM45 in your MGX 8000 Series switch chassis.

Private Network-to-Network Interface Priority Routing

This release supports the Private Network-to-Network Interface (PNNI) routing priority feature. This feature allows you to specify connections with a routing priority. The PNNI controller uses your configuration selections to route the higher priority connections before routing the lower priority connections. Use the cnfpncon command to configure a routing priority for a specified connection.

Note This feature requires you to use a PXM1E or PXM45 in your MGX 8000 Series switch chassis.

Chapter 4 Configuring VISM Features

Configuring Additional VISM Features

Additional SPVC Connection Management Capabilities

Use the PXM1E or the PXM 45 card in combination with the VISM-PR card in an MGX 8000 Series switch chassis to specify a connection up or down. Specifying a connection up allows you to direct traffic to the specified connection. Specifying a connection down allows you to prevent traffic from being directed to a specified connection. Use the upcon and dncon commands to use this feature.

Note This feature requires you to use a PXM1E or PXM45 in your MGX 8000 Series switch chassis.

192 T1/248 E1 DS0 Support with High Complexity Codecs on VISM-PR

VISM-PR T1 lines support up to 192 DS0 channels and VISM-PR E1 lines support up to 248 DS0 channels, with clear channel and the following codec types:

???G.711

???G.726

???G.729a

???G.729ab

Table 4-3 describes the VISM/VISM-PR DS0 density when the cards are used in combination with clear channel and the supported codecs.

Table 11 VISM/VISM-PR DS0 Density with Codec Support

Channel Alarm Enhancement

The channel alarm enhancement feature uses the modified dspconcnt command, which allows you to view the channel status bit map data.

VISM TDM Line Statistics Collection

This release allows you to configure VISM to collect Time Division Multiplex (TDM) line statistics. Use the dspalmcnt command to collect and display TDM line statistics. Use the cnfalmcnt command to configure the thresholds for TDM line statistics.

C H A P T E R 5

CLI Commands

Command line interface (CLI) commands allow you to configure, manage, and troubleshoot VISM to enable your applications.

The VISM CLI commands are described in the remainder of this chapter and are arranged in alphabetical order.

For information on how to access and use the CLI commands, see Chapter 4, ???Configuring VISM Features.???

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

?

?

name:

? ecan

Available commands

------------------

cnfecancnf cnfecannoise cnfecannr cnfecanrec cnfecantail

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addannpermanent

addannpermanent

To configure an announcement server file and associated codec type as permanent, use the addannpermanent command in the VoIP switching operating mode.

addannpermanent ann-index ann-filename ann-codec-type

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching

The G.723.1 codecs are supported for VISM-PR cards and are not supported for VISM cards.

The following example shows that index server number 19 is configured with the femalezero1 file in the G.726-40K codec:

addannpermanent 19 femalezero1 9

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addannpermanent

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addcasvar

addcasvar

To add a channel associated signaling (CAS) variant to a VISM card, name the CAS variant file, and optionally set the source of the file, use the addcasvar command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

addcasvar var-name file-name |source|

??? fgd_ea_incoming.o = for endpoints connected to an end office

??? fgd_ea_outgoing.o = for endpoints connected to an access carrier

??? fgd_os_e911.o = for endpoints connected to FDG OSS (Feature group D operator services system)

??? loop_start.o = loop start

??? delay_did_dod.o = dial delay, DTMF

??? delay_did_dod_mf.o = dial delay, MF

??? immed_did_dod.o = immediate start

??? immed_did_dod_mf.o = immediate start, MF

??? In the range from 1 to 32 alphanumeric characters???user-configured files only

Note Immediate start is not supported in VISM Release 2.2(0).

source (Optional) CAS variant file location. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = Unspecified. If TFTP domain is configured, the location is the TFTP server. If not found in the TFTP server, the file is treated as built-in.

???2 = User-configured (built-in) file location.

???3 = External???resides on the TFTP server.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines A file containing the variant information must be downloaded to the Cisco MGX 8000 Series platform PXM card, using a separate application (such as TFTP), before you can execute this command. This command downloads the specified file from the PXM card and configures the CAS variant on the VISM card based upon the information in the file. You can use this command at any time to add a new CAS variant.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addcasvar

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addccs

addccs

To add a common channel signaling (CCS) channel (D channel) to a VISM card, use the addccs command in the switched AAL2 PVC and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

addccs line-num ds0-num lcn

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Switched AAL2 PVC and AAL2 trunking

To use this command, you must select CCS signaling on the specified line with the cnflnsig command. When you execute this command, a value called ds0IfIndex is displayed, which is used to identify the CCS channel in subsequent CCS-related commands.

The following example shows that a CCS D channel is added to line 1, DS0 20, logical channel number 200:

addccs 1 20 200

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addcid

addcid

To add an AAL2 channel identifier (CID) on a VISM card, use the addcid command in the AAL2 trunking operating mode.

addcid endpt-num lcn cid-num codec-type profile-type profile-num |vad-enable vad-init-timer ecan-enable type-3-red cas-trans dtmf-trans idle-code-sup pkt-period|

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addcid

codec-type The type of coding/decoding to be performed on the data stream. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = G.711u

???2 = G.711a

???3 = G.726-32k

???4 = G.729a

???5 = G.729ab

???6 = Clear channel (VAD must be off)

???7 = G.726-16k

???8 = G.726-24k

???9 = G.726-40k

???11 = G.723-H

???12 = G.723a-H

???13 = G.723.1-L

???14 = G.723.1a-L

profile-type (Optional) The profile type to be used for the CID. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = International Telecommunication Union (ITU) I.366.2

???3 = Custom

Note If profile-type and profile-num argument values are both 1, you cannot turn

VAD on.

profile-num (Optional) Number of the profile. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = ITU profile type

???2 = ITU profile type

???3 = ITU profile type

???7 = ITU profile type

???8 = ITU profile type

???12 = ITU profile type

???100 = custom profile types

???101 = custom profile types

???110 = custom profile types

???200 = custom profile types

|vad-enable| (Optional) Enables or disables voice activity detection (VAD). It can be one of the following values:

1 = On

2 = Off

Note If you type 1 for both the profile-type and profile-num argument values,

VAD cannot be turned on.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addcid

|vad-init-timer| (Optional) The VAD initial (holdover) timer in the range from 250 to 65535 ms. Default = 250.

|ecan-enable| (Optional) Enables or disables echo cancellation (ECAN). It can be one of the following values:

???1 = On

???2 = Off

|type-3-red| (Optional) Enables or disables triple redundancy protection for type 3 packets. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = On

???2 = Off

Note If you select 1 for this argument value, either the cas-trans or dtmf-trans argument value must be set to 1 (on).

|cas-trans| (Optional) Enables or disables channel associated signaling (CAS) transport as AAL2 type3 packets. It can be one of the following values:

1 = On (Default)

2 = Off

This parameter does not affect any inbound signaling.

|dtmf-trans| (Optional) Enables or disables DTMF tone transport as AAL2 type 3 packets. It can be one of the following values:

1 = On (Default)

2 = Off

Note The dtmf-trans argument value must be set to 1 (on) when the codec-type is configured for codecs other than G.711 and G.726.

|idle-code-sup| (Optional) Enables or disables idle code suppression for the CID. It can be one of the following values:

1 = On

2 = Off

|pkt-period| (Optional) Packetization period (defined in milliseconds). Applies only to G.729a compression. It can be the following value:

??? 10

Note The pkt-period argument applies only to G.729a compression (codec-type argument value = 4). If you have selected any other compression value, ignore this argument.

Usage Guidelines This command establishes a relationship between an endpoint and an LCN/CID pair. The endpoint is bound to a DS0 and the CID binds a DS0 to a logical channel???ensuring an endpoint-to-endpoint trunk. The following conditions must be met before you use this command:

???A previously added endpoint must exist.

???PVC must be of bearer type and provisioned using the addcon command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addcid

??? The current DSP template must contain the desired codec type.

This command can be used on an endpoint that has no associated CAS variant. However, if a CAS variant is specified for the endpoint, it must be Q.50 variant (file q50.o)???the only CAS variant supported by this command.

The G.723.1 codecs are supported for VISM-PR cards and are not supported for VISM cards.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addcon

addcon

To add a permanent virtual circuit (PVC) connection between a VISM card and any service module (SM) or PXM card, use the addcon command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

addcon local-vci pref-level pvc-conn-type conn-app peak-cell-rate conn-type |remote-conn-id service-type sus-cell-rate max-burst-rate|

pvc-conn-type AAL type of connection. It can be one of the following values:

remote-conn-id (Optional) Remote connection identifier. Specify this argument with the following format: nodename.slot.port.vpi.vci

Note This argument is used only when the conn-type argument is set to 1 (master).

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addcon

???1 = Constant bit rate (CBR)

???2 = Variable bit rate real time, VBR (RT)

???3 = Variable bit rate non-real time, VBR (NRT)

???4 = VBR (RT) 3

???5 = VBR (RT) 2

???6 = VBR (NRT) 2

???7 = VBR (NRT) 3

Note Use value 7 for VISM-PR to RPM-PR connections.

sus-cell-rate (Optional) Sustainable cell rate (defined in cells per second). It can be in the range from 15 to the value you configured for the peak-cell-rate argument value.

Note This argument value is required if the service-type argument value is in the range from 2 to 7.

max-burst-rate (Optional) Maximum burst size???maximum number of cells transmitted at the peak cell rate. It can be in the range from 1 cell to 10 times the value you configured for the sus-cell-rate argument value.

Note This argument value is required if the service-type argument value is in the range from 2 to 7.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines You must execute the addport and addrscprtn commands before you use this command.

If you are using this command with the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode and dual PVCs, you must add the primary channel before the secondary channel.

If you are using this command with the AAL2 trunking operating mode, the pvc-conn-type argument value must be 1 (AAL5) for signaling and 2 (AAL2) for a bearer channel.

This command requires you to configure the PVC connections in the following ways for the different operating modes:

???VoIP switching/trunking operating mode addcon command configuration requirements:

???One AAL5 PVC connection with an optional secondary AAL5 PVC connection.

???AAL2 trunking operating mode addcon command configuration requirements:

???One AAL2 connection and up to 63 additional optional AAL2 connections to each remote location.

???Up to eight AAL5 connections for CCS signaling across the trunk, if your application requires CCS.

???Switched AAL2 PVC operating mode addcon command configuration requirements:

???One AAL2 connection.

???One AAL5 connection for communication with the call agent and external DNS.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addcon

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addconloop

addconloop

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To set a cellbus connection to local loopback state on a current card, use the addconloop command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

addconloop lcn

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example places the channel number 132 in loopback state:

addconloop 132

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

adddn

adddn

To add a domain name (call agent name, TFTP server name, domain name server (DNS) name, or announcement server name) and optionally configure the resolution type of the domain name, use the adddn command in the VoIP switching/trunking, and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

adddn domain-num domain-name |resol-type|

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that a call agent domain name, main, with a domain number of 3 is assigned the internal first resolution type (3):

adddn 3 main 3

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

adddn

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

adddnip

adddnip

To add the IP addresses for a domain name that you added by using the adddn command, use the adddnip command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

adddnip resol-num domain-name ip-addr addr-order

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that resolution number 22 is configured for domain name callagent35, with IP address 209.165.200.224, and an address resolution preference order of 7 (low):

adddnip 22 callagent35 209.165.200.224 7

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addendpt

addendpt

To add an endpoint on a VISM card line, use the addendpt command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

addendpt endpt-num ds1-num ds0-num

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

endpt-num Endpoint number. It can be a value from one of the following ranges:

???For template number 1:

???For VISM, from 1 to 145

???For VISM-PR T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM-PR E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 2:

???For VISM T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 3:

???For VISM, from 1 to 120

???For VISM-PR T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM-PR E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 4:

???For VISM-PR, from 1 to 144

ds1-num Physical line number in the range from 1 to 8.

ds0-num DS0 configured for the endpt-num value. It can be a value from one of the following ranges:

???For T1 lines, from 1 to 24

???For non-CAS E1 lines, from 1 to 31

???For CAS E1 lines, from 1 to 15 and 17 to 31

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

The endpoint on VISM is a logical port that consists of one DS0. The argument values entered in this command create an endpoint ID (endpt-num) which is required by the call agent for sending the xGCP Create Connection command (CRCX) to a VISM card. You can only configure bearer DS0s as endpoints to a previously added line.

Note The endpoint number is not equal to the DS0 number of the associated time slot. For example, endpoint 1 could be associated with DS011.

If your application requires the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode, you must add the IP address for VISM with the cnfvismip command before endpoints can be added.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addendpt

This command sends an RSIP message to each associated call agent indicating that the endpoint is in service.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addendptloop

addendptloop

To place an endpoint in a loopback condition in the TDM direction, use the addendptloop command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

addendptloop endpt-num

???For template number 1:

???For VISM, from 1 to 145

???For VISM-PR T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM-PR E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 2:

???For VISM T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 3:

???For VISM, from 1 to 120

???For VISM-PR T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM-PR E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 4:

???For VISM-PR, from 1 to 144

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addendpts

addendpts

To add multiple consecutive number of endpoints with a single command, use the addendpts command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

addendpts start-endpt start-line-num start-ds0-num endpt-quantity

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addendpts

start-ds0-num DS0 number to which the endpoints are added. It can be a value from one of the following ranges:

???1 to 24 for T1 lines

???1 to 31 for non-CAS E1 lines

???1 to 15 and 17 to 31 for CAS E1 lines

endpt-quantity The quantity of endpoints added. It can be a value from one of the following ranges:

???For template number 1:

???For VISM, from 1 to 145

???For VISM-PR T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM-PR E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 2:

???For VISM T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 3:

???For VISM, from 1 to 120

???For VISM-PR T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM-PR E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 4:

???For VISM-PR, from 1 to 144

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, and switched ATM AAL1 SVC

Usage Guidelines

Note If you are running a VoIP application, you must use the cnfvismip command before you can add endpoints.

This command adds a specified number of consecutive endpoints starting at a specified endpoint number, line number, and DS0 number. As endpoints are added, the command uses the next available (not added) endpoint numbers and DS0s. The command does not wrap around DS0 and endpoint numbers.

Note The endpoint number is not equal to the DS0 number of the associated time slot. For example, endpoint 1 could be associated with DS011.

Ensure that there are enough lines and DS0s before you add endpoints with this command. If you attempt to add more endpoints than are available, only the available endpoints are added. For example, if T1 line 1 is the only line enabled and you attempt to add 25 endpoints, only 24 endpoints are added. Your terminal display shows the actual number of endpoints added.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addendpts

This command sends an RSIP message to each associated call agent indicating that the endpoints are in service.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addlapd

addlapd

To add a Link Access Protocol D channel (LAPD) from a specified DS0 to a VISM card, use the addlapd command in VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

addlapd line-num ds0-num |lapd-side lapd-app-type|

Usage Guidelines You must complete the following before using this command:

???Specify the line as CCS.

???Ensure that the DS0 is available.

???Create a session group and session to a call agent.

Use this command when the specified channel is backhauled to the call agent.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addlapdtrunk

addlapdtrunk

To add a Link Access Protocol D channel (LAPD) trunk to a specific VISM card line, use the addlapdtrunk command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

addlapdtrunk line-num lapd-rudp-num

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the LAPD RUDP number 1 is added to VISM card line number 2:

addlapdtrunk 2 1

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addlapdtrunk

dsprudptrunk Displays the configuration data of a specified ISDN PRI backhaul RUDP session.

dsprudptrunks Displays the configuration data of all ISDN PRI backhaul RUDP sessions.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addln

addln

To add a T1 or E1 line to a VISM card, use the addln command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

addln line-num

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

line-num Line number of the T1 or E1 line to be added in the range from 1 to 8.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that line number 1 is added to a VISM card:

addln 1

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addlnloop

addlnloop

To set a specified line of the current card to the local loopback state, use the addlnloop command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

addlnloop line-num

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Note

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The VISM CLI has no specific command for setting a line to a remote loopback state. To set a line to remote loopback state, use the cnfbert command on the PXM card. Refer to MGX 8000 Series platform command line interface guides for more information.

The following example adds a local line loopback state to line 1:

addlnloop 1

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addmgcgrpentry

addmgcgrpentry

To configure a call agent as part of a media gateway controller (MGC) redundancy group and assign a priority value for the call agent, use the addmgcgrpentry command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

addmgcgrpentry mgc-group mgc-num mgc-preference

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addmgcgrpprotocol

addmgcgrpprotocol

To associate a call agent redundancy group with a gateway control protocol (xGCP) and configure call agent group protocol control data, use the addmgcgrpprotocol command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating mode.

addmgcgrpprotocol red-mgc-group protocol-num quar-persist default-quar del-negated prov-resp resp-ack disc-proc-enable cancel-grace

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addmgcgrpprotocol

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

This command allows you to add multiple protocols to the same redundancy group.

The following example shows that call agent redundancy group number 3 is assigned gateway control protocol number 2, SGCP 1.1+:

addmgcgrpprotocol 3 2

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addmgcgrpprotocol

dspmgcgrpparams Displays all configured call agent redundancy group parameters.

dspmgcgrpprotocols Displays all configured call agent redundancy group protocols.

dspmgcprpsDisplays all configured call agent redundancy groups.

dspsrcppeergrpparams Displays the SRCP parameters for all call agent redundancy groups that have SRCP added.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addport

addport

To add a virtual port between the VISM and PXM cards, use the addport command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, AAL1 SVC, AAL2 SVC, and AAL1/VoIP (for TDM grooming) operating modes.

addport

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addrscprtn

addrscprtn

To add a resource partition for a virtual port, use the addrscprtn command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, AAL1 SVC, AAL2 SVC, and AAL1/VoIP (for TDM grooming) operating modes.

addrscprtn control-id

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Note

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, AAL1 SVC, AAL2 SVC, and AAL1/VoIP (for TDM grooming)

You must configure a virtual port with the addport command before you use this command.

If the VISM card is reset after executing an addport command but before using this command, an error message is displayed. The error has no effect on the system and can be ignored.

If you are using a PXM1 card, this command adds an entry with resource partition number 1. If you are using a PXM1E card, this command adds the entries with resource partition numbers 225 and 2, respectively.

The following example shows that a resource partition is added to controller number 2:

addrscprtn 1

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addrtpcon

addrtpcon

To add a static Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) VoIP trunking connection, use the addrtpcon command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

addrtpcon conn-num endpt-num local-rtp-port remote-rtp-port remote-ip-addr codec-type |vt-pkt-period bearer-prec bearer-tos conn-mode ecan-enable vad-enable vad-timer cas-trans dtmf-trans idle-code-sup|

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addrtpcon

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addrtpcon

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking

The G.723.1 codecs are supported for VISM-PR cards and are not supported for VISM cards.

The following example shows that the RTP trunking connection 26 is added and configured with endpoint number 200, static RTP local port number 50000, static RTP remote port number 49648, remote IP address 209.165.200.224, G.726/32 codec type, 20-ms packetization period, bearer precedence of 3, bearer ToS of 1, VISM sends and receives packets, ECAN and VAD enabled, 400-ms VAD holdover time, CAS transportation enabled, DTMF tone transportation, idle code suppression for CID enabled:

addrtpcon 26 200 50000 49648 209.165.200.224 3 20 3 1 3 1 1 400 1 1 1

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addrtpcon

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addrudptrunk

addrudptrunk

To add an ISDN PRI backhaul Reliable User Datagram Protocol (RUDP) session for a Link Access Protocol D channel (LAPD) trunk connection, use the addrudptrunk command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

addrudptrunk session-num lport-num rport-num remote-ip-addr

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addrudptrunk

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addses

addses

To add a PRI backhaul session between a VISM card and a call agent, use the addses command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

addses session-num group-num priority local-port-num remote-port-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addsesgrp

addsesgrp

To add a PRI backhaul session group between a VISM card and a call agent, use the addsesgrp command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

addsesgrp group-num set-num mgc-name

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addsesset

addsesset

To add a PRI backhaul session set between a VISM card and a call agent, use the addsesset command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

addsesset set-num fault-tol-enable

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addtoneplan

addtoneplan

To add a provisional tone plan to the current VISM card, use the addtoneplan command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

You can add a maximum of 32 provisional tone plans to the system. You must create provisional tone plan files with the following format:

System Section version 1

description ???Tone Plan defined for xxxx??? Tone Section

dial_tone 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 busy_tone 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0 stutter_tone 1, 2, 3

dtmf_digit 1, 2

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addtoneplan

There is no restriction on the file name or extension of your tone plan definition file, but it must not exceed the maximum input size of the CLI command. Both the ???System Section??? and the ???Tone Section??? terms are mandatory keywords when creating tone plans. Use the ???System Section??? to define tone plans. Use the ???Tone Section??? to define call progress tones. Specify each tone on a separate line and use white spaces as delimiters. The syntax of the tone plan definition file defines call progress tones and must be specified in the following order and on the same line (see Table 5-1 for syntax value options):

tone-name num-of-freq-comp comp-1-freq comp-1-amp |comp-2-freq comp-2-amp| cadence-1-on cadence-1-off |cadence-2-on cadence-2-off cadence-3-on cadence-3-off cadence-4-on cadence-4-off|

Table 5-1 Tone Plan Definition File Syntax

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addtoneplan

Table 5-1 Tone Plan Definition File Syntax (continued)

1.To specify amplitudes of DTMF and MFR1 tones, you must use the following syntax: dtmf_digit amp-low amp-high or mf_r1_digit amp-low amp-high. The amp-low value = low group frequency. The amp-high value = high group frequency.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addxgcppersistevt

addxgcppersistevt

To add persistent xGCP (various gateway control protocol) events, use the addxgcppersistevt command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

addxgcppersistevt event-num pkg-event

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

??? r/co3 = VISM initiated AAL2 type 3 packet (CO3) network continuity test

??? r/co4 = Network continuity test detect

??? g/ft = Fax tone

??? g/mt = Modem tone

??? g/vbd = Voiceband data

??? g/vbdt = Voiceband data termination

??? l/hu, bl/hu = On hook

??? l/hd, blhd = Off hook

??? ms/ans, dt/ans, md/ans, mo/ans = Answer

??? ms/sup, dt/sup, md/sup = Setup

??? ms/rel, dt/rel, md/rel, mo/rel = Release

??? ms/rtc, dt/rlc, md/rlc, mo/rlc = Release complete

??? ms/res, dt/res, md/res = Resume

??? ms/sus, dt/sus, md/sus = Suspend

??? md/awk = Acknowledgment wink

??? mo/rbz = Reverse make busy

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

This command notifies the call agent of the specified event without the need for a xGCP notification request. There are no persistent xGCP events by default. Only valid xGCP strings (described in the pkg-event syntax description list) can be configured with this command.

The following example shows that the persistent event index number 1 is added for the voiceband data package:

addxgcppersistevt 1 g/vbd

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

addxgcppersistevt

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cc

cc

To navigate from the current (logged on) card to another card in the MGX 8000 Series platform, use the cc command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

When you execute this command, the card residing in the slot identified by the slot-num value becomes active and is identified in the command line prompt. If there is no card in the slot identified by the slot-num value, an error message is displayed on your terminal.

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

chkflash

chkflash

To verify the integrity of a VISM card???s flash memory, use the chkflash command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

chkflash

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

clralm

clralm

To clear alarms on a specific VISM card line, use the clralm command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

clralm -ds1 line-num

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

This command clears alarms caused by the collection of statistical data. Alarms caused by network failure cannot be cleared by using this command. For example, an alarm caused by a collection of bipolar errors can be cleared, but an alarm caused by a line failure cannot. Alarms that occur after you execute this command are not affected.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

clralmcnt

clralmcnt

To clear the alarm counters and statistics on a specified VISM line, use the clralmcnt command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

clralmcnt -ds1 line-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

clralmcnts

clralmcnts

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

clralms

clralms

To clear alarms on a VISM card, use the clralms command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

clralms

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

This command can clear alarms caused only by the collection of statistical data. Alarms caused by network failure cannot be cleared. For example, an alarm caused by a collection of bipolar errors can be cleared, but an alarm caused by a line failure cannot. Alarms occurring after this command executes are not affected.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

clrcacfailcntrs

clrcacfailcntrs

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

clrmngcidcnt

clrmngcidcnt

To clear AAL2 channel identifier (CID) counters, use the clrmngcidcnt command in the switched AAL2 PVC and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

clrrtpcnt

clrrtpcnt

To clear the Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) counters (statistics) for a specific static RTP connection, as shown by the dsprtpcnt command, use the clrrtpcnt command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

clrrtpcnt conn-num

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the RTP counters for static RTP connection number 49 are cleared:

clrrtpcnt 49

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

clrrtpcnt

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

clrsarcnt

clrsarcnt

To clear the segmentation and reassembly (SAR) counters on a channel, use the clrsarcnt command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

clrsarcnts

clrsarcnts

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

clrsarmsgcnt

clrsarmsgcnt

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

clrscrn

clrscrn

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

clrslipcnt

clrslipcnt

To clear current clock slip counters for a specified VISM card line, use the clrslipcnt command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL1 SVC, switched AAL2 SVC, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

clrtaskinfo

clrtaskinfo

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfaal2subcellmuxing

cnfaal2subcellmuxing

To enable or disable AAL2 subcell multiplexing, use the cnfaal2subcellmuxing command in the AAL2 trunking operating mode.

cnfaal2subcellmuxing mux-enable

???1 = On

???2 = Off

Usage Guidelines When you enable multiplexing, multiple CPS packets are multiplexed onto a single AAL2 connection without partial fill (unless there is a timeout). When you disable multiplexing, each CPS packet fills one or two cells (with padding).

Note The field length for each CPS packet can be up to 64 bytes.

When the multiplexing type is changed if CIDs are present, the card is reset and existing

CIDs/connections are restored with the multiplexing type.

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfaal2timerparams

cnfaal2timerparams

To configure the holdover time for VAD in milliseconds before activating silence suppression on an AAL2 PVC, use the cnfaal2timerparams command in the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode.

cnfaal2timerparams vad-init-timer cid-fill-time

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfaal2transparams

cnfaal2transparams

To configure the transportation of DTMF and CAS bits to another endpoint and enable or disable type 3 packet triple redundancy feature, use the cnfaal2transparams command in the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode.

cnfaal2transparams dtmf-trans cas-bits-trans type-3-red

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfadapgain

cnfadapgain

To enable or disable the DSP adaptive gain feature, use the cnfadapgain command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfadapgain adap-gain-enable

???1 = On

???2 = Off

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures when using this command.

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfalm

cnfalm

To configure the alarm parameters for a specified line, use the cnfalm command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfalm -ds1 line-num -red red-sev -rai rai-sev -neu ne-alarm-up -ned ne-alarm-down -net ne-alarm-thresh -feu fe-alarm-up -fed fe-alarm-down -fet fe-alarm-thresh

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures when using this command.

The following example shows that line 2 is configured with a red severity alarm of major, and an RAI severity of minor:

cnfalm -ds1 2 -red 1 -rai 1

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfalm

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfalmcnt

cnfalmcnt

To configure the collection of Time Division Multiplex (TDM) line statistics, use the cnfalmcnt command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfalmcnt -ds1 line-num -sev alarm-severity -lcv15 lcv-15min -lcv24 lcv-24hr -les15 les-15min -les24 les-24hr -lses15 lses-15min -lses24 lses-24hr -crc15 crc-15min -crc24 crc-24hr -crces15 crces-15min -crces24 crces-24hr -crcses15 crcses-15min -crcses24 crcses-24hr -sefs15 sefs-15min -sefs24 sefs-24hr -aiss15 aiss-15min -aiss24 aiss-24hr -uas15 uas-15min -uas24 uas-24hr

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

Usage Guidelines Values higher than 2,147,483,647 for the argument values are truncated. The following line statistics are collected:

???Line code violations encountered by the line interface in the current 15-minute interval.

???Line code violations in the last 15-minute period encountered by the interface.

???Line code violations in the last 24-hour period encountered by the interface.

???Line code violations Errored Seconds encountered by the interface.

???Line code violations Errored Seconds in the last 15 minutes encountered by the interface.

???Line code violations Errored Seconds in the last 24 hours encountered by the interface.

???Line code violations Severely Errored Seconds encountered by the interface.

???Line code violations Severely Errored Seconds in the last 15 minutes encountered by the interface.

???Line code violations Severely Errored Seconds in the last 24 hours encountered by the interface.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfalmcnt

???CRC code violations encountered by the interface.

???CRC code violations in the last 15 minutes encountered by the interface.

???CRC code violations in the last 24 hours encountered by the interface.

???CRC code violated Errored Seconds encountered by the interface.

???CRC code violated Errored Seconds in the last 15 minutes encountered by the interface.

???CRC code violated Errored Seconds in the last 24 hours encountered by the interface.

???P Bit code violations Severely Errored Seconds encountered by the interface.

???CRC code violated Severely Errored Seconds in the last 15 minutes encountered by the interface.

???CRC code violated Severely Errored Seconds in the last 24 hours encountered by the interface.

???Severely Errored Framing Seconds encountered by the interface.

???Severely Errored Framing Seconds in the last 15 minutes encountered by the interface.

???Severely Errored Framing Seconds in the last 24 hours encountered by the interface.

???AIS Severely Errored Seconds encountered by the interface.

???AIS Severely Errored Seconds in the last 15 minutes encountered by the interface.

???AIS Severely Errored Seconds in the last 24 hours encountered by the interface.

???Unavailable Seconds encountered by the interface.

???Unavailable Seconds in the last 15 minutes encountered by the interface.

???Unavailable Seconds in the last 24 hours encountered by the interface.

???Percentage of LCV Error Free Seconds.

???Loss of Signal detected with or without integrating to LOS alarm.

???Out of Frame detected with or without integrating to OOF alarm.

???Yellow Alarms detected with or without integrating to RAI alarm.

???Framing Pattern Errors encountered by a DS1 interface.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfannagetime

cnfannagetime

To configure the time that a nonpermanent announcement is to remain valid after it is placed into the VISM announcement cache, use the cnfannagetime command in the VoIP switching operating mode.

cnfannagetime nonpann-age-time

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

VoIP switching

When a nonpermanent announcement enters the announcement cache, it remains valid, as is, until the time you select for the nonpann-age-time argument value expires. When the time expires, the nonpermanent announcement is refreshed from the announcement file server. Requests to play a nonpermanent announcement do not affect its age time or cause the file to be refreshed.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfannagetime

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfanndn

cnfanndn

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

To designate the announcement file server domain name, use the cnfanndn command in the VoIP switching operating mode.

cnfanndn ann-domain-name

ann-domain-name The announcement file server domain name. In the range from 1 to 64 alphanumeric characters. You may also use forward slashes (/), backward slashes (\), periods, hyphens, and underscores when creating an announcement file server domain name.

Note Do not use forward slashes (/) or hyphens as the last character in an announcement file server name. Do not use spaces in an announcement file server domain name.

VoIP switching

You must add the announcement file server name as a regular node name using the VISM XDNS commands before you use this command.

The following example shows that the announcement file server is configured with the name announceserver3:

cnfanndn announceserver3

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfanndn

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfannpathprefix

cnfannpathprefix

To designate the main prefix directory Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) path from which to retrieve announcement files from the announcement file server, use the cnfannpathprefix command in the VoIP switching operating mode.

cnfannpathprefix ann-prefix-path

Usage Guidelines The prefix directory path is prefixed to the codec directory and the filename. The path prefix will be relative to the default TFTP directory on the announcement file server. Examples of valid prefix directory paths are:

???<null string>

???vism_ann

???cisco/vism_ann

???/cisco/vism_ann

Note The /cisco/vism_ann path starts at the root directory on the announcement file server because it begins with a backslash (/).

If you do not use this command, the default TFTP directory on the announcement file server is used as the prefix directory path.

You can use any directory or path on the announcement file server as the main directory for storing announcement files. Take into consideration the following guidelines when you use this command:

???If you do not configure an announcement path prefix on the VISM, the main announcement file directory is the default TFTP directory on the server.

???If you configure a path prefix, it is used as the main announcement directory.

???If the path prefix is not absolute (does not begin with /), then the prefix is relative to the default TFTP directory.

You must configure codec subdirectories under the main announcement directory on the announcement file server. One or more of the following codec subdirectories, for each encoding, are used for announcement files:

???g711u/

???g711a/

???g726_32k/

???g726_24k/

???g726_16k/

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfannpathprefix

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfannpathprefix

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfannprefcodec

cnfannprefcodec

To configure the codec type used for announcements played on unconnected Time Division Multiplex (TDM) endpoints, use the cnfannprefcodec command in the VoIP switching operating mode.

cnfannprefcodec ann-codec-type

???1 = G.711u

???2 = G.711a

???3 = G.726-32k

???4 = G.729a

???5 = G.729ab

???7 = G.726-16k

???8 = G.726-24k

???9 = G.726-40k

???11 = G.723.1-H

???12 = G.723.1a-H

???13 = G.723.1-L

???14 = G.723.1a-L

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfannprefcodec

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfannreqtimeout

cnfannreqtimeout

To configure the expiration time for announcements to begin playing after the VISM receives the announcement signal (request) from the call agent, use the cnfannreqtimeout command in the VoIP switching operating mode. Requests are aborted when the expiration time is reached and the announcement has not started.

cnfannreqtimeout ann-req-time

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching

If the call agent signals the announcement to be played toward the packet network on a connection that is not in a send mode, the request is deferred until the call agent modifies the connection. Once the connection is placed in send mode, the expiration timer is started.

The following example shows that announcements must begin playing within 12 seconds after the VISM receives the announcement signal from the call agent, after which time, requests are aborted:

cnfannreqtimeout 12

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfannreqtimeout

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcac

cnfcac

To enable or disable the connection admission control (CAC) feature on a VISM card, use the cnfcac command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfcac cac-enable

???1 = On

???2 = Off

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcacparams

cnfcacparams

To configure connection admission control (CAC) features on a card, use the cnfcacparams command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfcacparams vad-duty-cycle vad-tol

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

It can be in the range from 0 to 10000. (Default = 100)

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures when using this command.

The following example shows that VAD is configured for a duty cycle of 50 and a tolerance of 500:

cnfcacparams 50 500

CommandDescription

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcalea

cnfcalea

To enable or disable the Communications Assistance for Law Enforcement Act (CALEA) feature on the current VISM card, use the cnfcalea command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfcalea calea-enable

???1 = On

???2 = Off (Default)

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

You must ensure that you are using the VISM software version that supports CALEA in order to use the CALEA feature. The CALEA implementation supports the CALEA law intercept confirmation interface.

The following example shows that the CALEA feature is enabled on the current VISM card:

cnfcalea 1

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcascode

cnfcascode

To configure channel associated signaling (CAS) idle code and seized code parameters for an endpoint, use the cnfcascode command in the AAL2 trunking operating mode.

cnfcascode endpt-num idle-code seized-code |endpts-num|

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcascode

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasdialdelay

cnfcasdialdelay

To configure the VISM wait time (dial delay) for outpulsing digits to the PBX after sending an off-hook event, use the cnfcasdialdelay command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

cnfcasdialdelay endpt-num dial-delay

Usage Guidelines You can execute this command if the following conditions are met:

???The endpoint represented by the endpt-num argument value has been previously added.

???The associated DS0 is configured for CAS.

???The protocol is immediate start.

???The MIB was chosen as the source in the cnfcasparamsource command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasdialdelay

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasendpt

cnfcasendpt

To associate an endpoint with a channel associated signaling (CAS) variant name, use the cnfcasendpt command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfcasendpt endpt-num var-name

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

VoIP switching/trunking

The endpoint and CAS variant must be previously added before you execute this command.

If there is no connection on an endpoint when the endpoint is associated with a CAS variant, use the cnfcasendpt command again to change the CAS variant. However, if there is a connection on an endpoint, you must delete the endpoint, add it back, and then execute the cnfcasendpt command to change the CAS variant.

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasflashtime

cnfcasflashtime

To configure the minimum and maximum channel associated signaling (CAS) on-hook time periods for incoming flash hooks on a specified endpoint, use the cnfcasflashtime command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfcasflashtime endpt-num min-flash-time max-flash-time

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Use this command to allow VISM to distinguish flash hooks from disconnects by configuring the on-hook flash duration. An on-hook event with a duration that falls in the configured range is interpreted as a flash hook. An on-hook event with a duration shorter than the configured range is ignored. An on-hook event longer than the configured range is interpreted as a disconnect.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasflashtime

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasglareattrib

cnfcasglareattrib

To configure the direction of channel associated signaling (CAS) calls and the glare (dual seizure event) policy for a specified endpoint, use the cnfcasglareattrib command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfcasglareattrib endpt-num cas-direction glare-pol

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Note You can assign a glare-pol argument value of 2 only if the cas-direction argument is assigned a value of 1.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Use this command to assist in controlling TDM glare events. Use the cas-direction argument to allow or disallow glare events. Use the glare-pol argument value to configure the resolution of glare events if you allow them to occur. Resolution of glare events is either to enable VISM to release a call and accept a call from the PBX, or wait for the PBX to release a call and enable VISM to continue with a call.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasglareattrib

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasglaretime

cnfcasglaretime

To configure the channel associated signaling (CAS) glare time for an endpoint, use the cnfcasglaretime command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

cnfcasglaretime endpt-num glaretime

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasglaretime

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasguardtime

cnfcasguardtime

To configure the channel associated signaling (CAS) guard time for an endpoint, use the cnfcasguardtime command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

cnfcasguardtime endpt-num guardtime

Note To use this command, you must choose the MIB as the source in the cnfcasparamsource command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasguardtime

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasoffhooktime

cnfcasoffhooktime

To configure a minimum presence time, on an endpoint, for a CAS off-hook pattern to be recognized as an off-hook signal, use the cnfcasoffhooktime command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

cnfcasoffhooktime endpt-num offhooktime

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasonhooktime

cnfcasonhooktime

To configure a minimum presence time, on an endpoint, for a CAS on-hook pattern to be recognized as an on-hook signal, use the cnfcasonhooktime command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

cnfcasonhooktime endpt-num onhooktime

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasonhooktime

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcaspackage

cnfcaspackage

To configure the Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) packages to notify persistent observed channel associated signaling (CAS) events in the context of incoming and outgoing CAS calls on a specified endpoint, use the cnfcaspackage command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfcaspackage endpt-num in-package out-package

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcaspackage

Note If you set the package to anything other than basic on an endpoint with this command, persistent events observed on that endpoint are encoded as an event in that package if the event is defined in that package, or dropped if they are not defined in that package. Packages N and S are not supported.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcaspackage

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Note If you set the package to anything other than basic on an endpoint with this command, persistent events observed on that endpoint are encoded as an event in that package if the event is defined in that package, or dropped if they are not defined in that package. Packages N and S are not supported.

1. Dial pulse is not supported in VISM.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

This command enables RFC 3064 support.

The following example shows that the MGCP packages for endpoint number 83 are configured with mgcplin as the MGCP incoming package name and mgcplout as the MGCP outgoing package name:

cnfcaspackage 83 mgcp1in mgcp1out

Related Commands

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcaspackage

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasparamsource

cnfcasparamsource

To configure channel associated signaling (CAS)-related timer source parameters for an endpoint, use the cnfcasparamsource command in the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode.

cnfcasparamsource endpt-num cas-source

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasparamsource

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasvar

cnfcasvar

To configure a previously added channel associated signaling (CAS) variant timing parameters, use the cnfcasvar command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

cnfcasvar var-name country-code partial-time critical-time interdigit-timeout

country-code

partial-time

The country code of the variant. The value must be a two-character text string.

The partial dial time (defined in seconds) in the range from 10 to 10000???in increments of 10.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcaswinktime

cnfcaswinktime

To configure the channel associated signaling (CAS) wink time parameters???minimum and maximum make times, and minimum break time???for an endpoint, use the cnfcaswinktime command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

cnfcaswinktime endpt-num min-make-time max-make-time min-break-time

Usage Guidelines A wink is composed of the following sequential events:

1.On-hook pattern

2.Off-hook pattern

3.Return to an on-hook pattern

The minimum and maximum make times are the minimum and maximum durations that the off-hook pattern persists. The minimum break time is the minimum duration that the on-hook pattern persists following the return to on-hook.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcaswinktime

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcasxgcp

cnfcasxgcp

To configure channel associated signaling (CAS) variant retransmission parameters, use the cnfcasxgcp command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

cnfcasxgcp var-name retrans-time start-retrans-time retrans-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfclksrc

cnfclksrc

To configure the PXM1, PXM1E, PXM45, VISM, or VISM-PR card clock source, use the cnfclksrc command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfclksrc slot-num.port-num clk-type

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Specify the cnfclksrc command argument values according to the following rules:

???To configure any line except for line 1 of a VISM card, you must use a VISM-PR card in combination with a PXM1E or PXM45 in your MGX 8000 Series switch chassis.

???If the clock source is the external BITS clock (a T1 or E1 port on the PXM back card), specify the configuration as:

cnfclksrc 7.35 p

Note Type 7 for the slot number regardless of the PXM card???s location in the chassis. Type 35 for the port number???the BITS port is always port 35.

??? If the clock source is an external signal on one of the PXM OC3 ports, specify the configuration as:

cnfclksrc 7.n p

Note Type 7 for the slot number regardless of the PXM card???s location in the chassis. The n port parameter value is the OC3 port number in the range 1 to 4.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfclksrc

???If the clock source is the PXM???s internal crystal and no other clock source has been specified, do not configure the clock source. The crystal is the automatic default.

???If you want to change the clocking source from external to the PXM card???s internal crystal, specify the configuration as:

cnfclksrc 7.X n

Note Type 7 for the slot number regardless of the PXM card???s location in the chassis. The X argument value is the either 35 or the OC3 port number, depending upon which is the currently specified source. The null port number argument value cancels the previous configuration and returns the clocking source to the default internal crystal.

??? If the clock source is from a line on a VISM card, specify the configuration as:

cnfclksrc Y.1 p

Note The Y argument value is the actual slot number of the VISM card. Always type 1 for port argument value, which represents the line number in this configuration.

Refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 Installation and Configuration Guide and the Cisco MGX 8000 Series Switch Command Reference for information on the following PXM card clocking commands:

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfco4timer

cnfco4timer

To configure the bearer continuity test CO4 timer value, use the cnfco4timer command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspvismparam Displays the current VISM card configuration.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcodecjtrdelay

cnfcodecjtrdelay

To configure the jitter delay mode and initial delay value for a specified codec, use the cnfcodecjtrdelay command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfcodecjtrdelay codec-type jitter-mode jitter-delay

jitter-mode Jitter delay mode. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = Fixed. Cisco recommends fixed mode if latency jitter is constant.

???2 = Adaptive. Cisco recommends adaptive if latency jitter is variable.

jitter-delay Initial jitter delay (defined in milliseconds). It can be a value from one of the following ranges:

???For codec templates 1, 3, and 4, in the range from 0 to 100 in increments of 10.

???For codec template 2, in the range from 0 to 100 in increments of 5.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines Cisco recommends that you configure the jitter-delay argument to 20 ms when using DSP firmware versions 3.4 and 3.6.

The G.723.1 codecs are supported for VISM-PR cards and are not supported for VISM cards.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcodecjtrdelay

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcodecneg

cnfcodecneg

To configure the priority order of the lists of codec list priority order, use the cnfcodecneg command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfcodecneg codec-priority

???1 = LCO list, remote SDP data list, local MIB

???2 = LCO list, local MIB, remote SDP data list

???3 = Remote SDP data list, LCO list, local MIB

???4 = Remote SDP data list, local MIB, LCO list

???5 = Local MIB, LCO list, remote SDP data list

???6 = Local MIB, remote SDP data list, LCO list

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

VoIP switching/trunking

Codec lists include the following:

???Call agent provided list in a local connection option (LCO)

???Remote gateway provided list in the Session Description Protocol (SDP) data

???Local MIB provided list

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcodecparams

cnfcodecparams

To configure codec parameters???codec packetization period, preference, Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) registered codec type and xGCP codec string???for AAL1 and IP calls, use the cnfcodecparams command in the VoIP switching operating mode.

cnfcodecparams codec-type codec-pkt-period |preference codec-string iana-type|

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcodecparams

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching

The packetization period parameter is required but the remaining parameters are optional. The parameters of any codec can be configured regardless of whether the current codec template supports that codec.

If you are using template 2, the G.726 and G.729 codec types are ignored and replaced with clear channel.

The G.723.1 codecs are supported for VISM-PR cards and are not supported for VISM cards.

The following example shows that the codec with identification number 3 is configured with a packetization period of 20 ms, has the highest priority, is not an IANA registered codec, and is represented by the string geeseven:

cnfcodecparams 3 20 1 0 geeseven

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcodectmpl

cnfcodectmpl

To assign a codec template to an entire VISM card, use the cnfcodectmpl command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfcodectmpl template-num

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

template-num Template number assigned to the current VISM card. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = G.711u, G.711a, G.726-16k, G.726-24k, G.726-32k, G.726-40k, G.729a, and G.729ab codecs, and clear channel

Note Template 1 is limited to 145 DS0s for VISM and 248 DS0s for VISM-PR.

???2 = G.711u and G.711a uncompressed codecs, and clear channel

???3 = G.711u, G.711a, G.726-16k, G.726-24k, G.726-32k, G.726-40k, G.729a, and G.729ab codecs and clear channel

Note Codec template number 3 = template number 1 with T.38 support added. Template 3 is limited to 120 DS0s for VISM and 248 for VISM-PR.

???4 = G.711u, G.711a, G. 726-16k, G.726-24k, G.726-32k, G.726-40k, G.729a, G.729ab, G.723.1-H, G.723.1a-H, G.723.1-L, G.723.1a-L codecs and clear channel

Note Template 4 supports a maximum of 144 channels for VISM-PR.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

The following list describes the maximum number of channels supported by the different templates:

???Template 1: 145 T1 channels, or 145 E1 channels.

???Template 2: 192 T1 channels, or 248 E1 channels.

???Template 3: 120 T1 channels, or 120 E1 channels. Templates define allowable voice encoding types.

The execution of this command requires your confirmation because the card resets after you execute this command.

This command is not allowed if CIDs are present.

The G.723.1 codecs are supported for VISM-PR cards and are not supported for VISM cards.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcodectmpl

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcompvad

cnfcompvad

To enable or disable voice activity detection (VAD) on a T1 or E1 line, use the cnfcompvad command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfcompvad line-num vad-enable

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures when using this command.

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcon

cnfcon

To configure a connection between a VISM card and an MGX 8000 Series platform PXM card, use the cnfcon command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfcon lcn peak-cell-rate service-type |sus-cell-rate max-burst-rate|

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfcon

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfconcac

cnfconcac

To configure connection admission control (CAC) on a previously added connection, use the cnfconcac command in the AAL2 trunking operating mode.

cnfconcac lcn conn-type

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfconcacparams

cnfconcacparams

To configure connection admission control (CAC) features on a PVC, use the cnfconcacparams command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfconcacparams lcn vad-tol vad-duty-cycle

It can be in the range from 0 to 10000. (Default = 100)

vad-duty-cycle VAD duty cycle???the ratio of speech and holdover duration to total duration expressed as a percentage. Holdover is the period after silence begins and silence suppression is turned on. In VISM, the holdover time is 250 ms. A typical value for this parameter is 61 which means that 61% of the time is taken by speech and holdover. It can be in the range from 1 to 99. (Default = 61)

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfconcacpol

cnfconcacpol

To configure the policies for fax/modem upspeed connection admission control (CAC) failure and fax/modem carrier loss for calls added to a particular IP or AAL2 LCN, use the cnfconcacpol command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfconcacpol lcn carrier-loss-pol cac-reject-pol

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

carrier-loss-pol Carrier loss policy. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = Revert to the previous codec

???2 = Maintain the upspeed codec

???3 = Unspecified

Note If you select 3 (unspecified), the card level default is used.

cac-reject-pol CAC rejection policy. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = Delete the connection

???2 = Maintain the connection

???3 = Unspecified

Note If you select 3 (unspecified), the card level default is used.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

If you select 3 (unspecified) for the carrier-loss-pol or cac-reject-pol argument values, the card level default are used.

The following example shows that LCN 131 is configured with a carrier loss policy of 1 (if carrier is lost, the LCN reverts to the previous codec) and a CAC rejection policy of 2 (the LCN connection is maintained):

cnfconcacpol 131 1 2

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfconprotect

cnfconprotect

To configure protection on a PVC, use the cnfconprotect command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfconprotect lcn protect-enable lock-state second-lcn

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfconvbdpol

cnfconvbdpol

To configure the policies for fax/modem upspeed connection admission control (CAC) failure and fax/modem carrier loss for calls added to a particular IP or AAL2 LCN, use the cnfconvbdpol command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfconvbdpol lcn carrier-loss-pol cac-reject-pol

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

carrier-loss-pol Carrier loss policy. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = Revert to the previous codec

???2 = Maintain the upspeed codec

???3 = Unspecified

Note If you select 3 (unspecified), the card level default is used.

cac-reject-pol CAC rejection policy. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = Delete the connection

???2 = Maintain the connection

???3 = Unspecified

Note If you select 3 (unspecified), the card level default is used.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

If you select 3 (unspecified) for the carrier-loss-pol or cac-reject-pol argument values, the card level default are used.

The following example shows that LCN 131 is configured with a carrier loss policy of 1 (if carrier is lost, the LCN reverts to the previous codec) and a CAC rejection policy of 2 (the LCN connection is maintained):

cnfconvbdpol 131 1 2

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfconvcci

cnfconvcci

To associate a virtual circuit connection identifier (VCCI) and a remote address with an LCN, use the cnfconvcci in the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode.

cnfconvcci lcn vcci-num addr-type |fe-addr|

The VCCI number must be unique for the unspecified (5) address type, even though the far end address is not used.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfdeftos

cnfdeftos

To configure the type of service (ToS) parameters for both control and bearer IP packets, use the cnfdeftos command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfdeftos control-prec control-tos |bearer-prec bearer-tos|

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking

The ToS bearer parameters???configured with the bearer-prec and bearer-tos arguments???are used during call setup in cases where the parameters are not supplied by the call agent. If you do not use this command, the card level default values are applied.

The following example shows that bearer IP packets are configured with a control precedence of 3 and a control ToS of 2, and the control IP packets are configured with a bearer precedence of 2 and a bearer ToS of 4:

cnfdeftos 3 2 2 4

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfdisctimers

cnfdisctimers

To specify the wait delay times for the disconnected procedure, restart in progress command???initial, minimum, and maximum timer values???use the cnfdisctimers command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL1 SVC, switched AAL2 SVC, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

cnfdisctimers init-wait-time min-wait-time max-wait-time

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL1 SVC, switched AAL2 SVC, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC

You must use the cnfmgcgrpprotocol command and select the disconnect type method for Restart in Progress commands before you can use this command.

The following example shows that an initial disconnect waiting time of 30 seconds, a minimum disconnect waiting time of 0 seconds, and a maximum disconnect waiting time of 120 seconds is configured for the current VISM card:

cnfdisctimers 30 0 120

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfdn

cnfdn

To configure the resolution type of a specified domain name, use the cnfdn command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfdn domain-num resol-type

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfdn

Command Description

dspdnips Displays all statistically provisioned and externally resolved IP addresses configured for a specified domain name.

dspdnssrvr Displays the domain name of the configured DNS of the current VISM card.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfdnssrvr

cnfdnssrvr

To designate a domain name as a domain name server (DNS), use the cnfdnssrvr command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfdpvcoamparams

cnfdpvcoamparams

To configure the transmitted and received permanent virtual circuit (PVC) Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) cell parameters, use the cnfdpvcoamparams command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfdpvcoamparams cell-gap recov-cell-num unack-cell-num

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the transmitted and received PVC OAM parameters are configured with a 20 ms intercell gap, a 5-cell recovery indication cell count, and a 10-cell unacknowledge indication cell count:

cnfdpvcoamparams 20 5 10

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfds0gain

cnfds0gain

To configure the adjustable gain for a specified DS0, use the cnfds0gain command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfds0gain line-num ds0-num input-gain output-atten

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfds0localcas

cnfds0localcas

To configure a local channel associated signaling (CAS) 4-bit pattern for a T1 line and DS0, use the cnfds0localcas command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfds0localcas line-num ds0-num local-cas-enable |local-cas-pattern|

This command is not allowed if any of the following conditions are present:

???The line signaling type is CAS.

???The line is not enabled.

???The DS0 is in a remote loop state.

Note This command is allowed for T1 lines only.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfds0localcas

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfds0loop

cnfds0loop

To configure a loopback type for a specified line and DS0, use the cnfds0loop command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfds0loop line-num ds0-num loopback-type

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfds0musicthreshold

cnfds0musicthreshold

To configure the music on-hold threshold for a specified DS0, use the cnfds0musicthreshold command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfds0musicthreshold line-num ds0-num music-thresh

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfecanenable

cnfecanenable

To enable or disable echo cancellation on a line, use the cnfecanenable command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfecanenable line-num ecan-enable

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfecanrec

cnfecanrec

To configure residual echo control for digital signal processors (DSPs) on a VISM card line that is used for echo cancellation, use the cnfecanrec command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfecanrec line-num res-echo-control

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfecantail

cnfecantail

To configure the maximum tail length for digital signal processors (DSPs) on a VISM card that is used for echo cancellation, use the cnfecantail command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfecantail line-num max-ecan-tail

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

max-ecan-tail Maximum tail length (defined in milliseconds). It can be one of the following values:

???24

???32 (Default)

???48

???64

???80

???96

???112

???128

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

This command applies to DSPs processing data on a specified line.

The following example shows that line 3 of the current VISM card is configured with a maximum ECAN tail length of 96 ms:

cnfecantail 3 96

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfendptcadence

cnfendptcadence

To configure cadence (digit tone) times for an endpoint, use the cnfendptcadence command in the VoIP switching/trunking and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfendptcadence endpt-num tone-on-time tone-off-time

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnferl

cnferl

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfgain

cnfgain

To configure the adjustable gain for a VISM card, use the cnfgain command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfgain input-gain output-atten

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfgwis

cnfgwis

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfgwoos

cnfgwoos

To configure an in-service VISM card to the out-of-service state, use the cnfgwoos command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

The VISM card prompt terminates with an s to indicate the out-of-service (standby) state:

NODENAME.1.9.VISM8.s

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfjtrinitdelay

cnfjtrinitdelay

To configure the initial jitter buffer delay size, use the cnfjtrinitdelay command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating mode.

cnfjtrinitdelay jitter-buffer-size

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

jitter-buffer-size Jitter buffer size setting (defined in milliseconds). It can be a value from one of the following ranges:

???For template numbers 1, 3, and 4, in the range from 0 to 100 in increments of 10.

???For template number 2, in the range from 0 to 100 in increments of 5.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Determine the current jitter delay mode you configured with the cnfjtrmode command. If the mode is set to fixed (set by the command) the jitter buffer size is fixed at the value you indicate for the jitter-buffer-size argument for the duration of the call. If the mode is set to adaptive, the jitter buffer size is set initially to the value you indicate for the jitter-buffer-size argument and the digital signal processor (DSP) adapts the jitter buffer size to an optimal size.

Changing the jitter-buffer-size argument value does not affect existing channel identifiers (CIDs). The new value is sent to the DSPs only when CIDs are open.

Table 5-2 lists the default codec type initial delay values in milliseconds.

Table 5-2 Codec Type Default Values

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfjtrinitdelay

1. The G.723.1 codecs are supported for VISM-PR cards and are not supported for VISM cards.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfjtrmode

cnfjtrmode

To configure the jitter algorithm with a fixed or adaptive buffer, use the cnfjtrmode command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfjtrmode jitter-mode

???1 = Fixed. Cisco recommends fixed mode if latency jitter is constant.

???2 = Adaptive. Cisco recommends adaptive if latency jitter is variable.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflapdretrans

cnflapdretrans

To configure a maximum number of frame retransmissions for a previously added Link Access Protocol D channel (LAPD), use the cnflapdretrans command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnflapdretrans line-num ds0-num n200

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflapdtimer

cnflapdtimer

To configure two LAPD timers for a previously added Link Access Protocol D channel (LAPD), use the cnflapdtimer command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnflapdtimer line-num ds0-num frame-trans-time frame-exchange-time

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI command procedures.

The following example shows that line 2, DS0 12 is configured with 10000 ms between frame transmission initiations (timer T200) and 20000 ms as a maximum time allowed without a frame being exchanged (timer T203):

cnflapdtimer 2 12 10000 20000

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflapdtimer

CommandDescription

cnflapdtype Configures the various types of LAPD stacks for a previously added LAPD.

cnflapdwinsize Configures a maximum allowed number of outstanding (unacknowledged) I-frames on a previously added LAPD.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflapdtrunkpvc

cnflapdtrunkpvc

To assign the permanent virtual circuit (PVC) trunk type that carries Link Access Protocol D channel (LAPD) messages for the current VISM card, use the cnflapdtrunkpvc command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnflapdtrunkpvc lapd-trunk-type

???1 = Control

???2 = Bearer (Default)

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflapdtrunkpvc

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflapdtype

cnflapdtype

To configure the various types of Link Access Protocol D channel (LAPD) stacks for a previously added LAPD, use the cnflapdtype command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnflapdtype line-num ds0-num lapd-type

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflapdtype

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflapdwinsize

cnflapdwinsize

To configure a maximum number of outstanding (unacknowledged) I-frames, use the cnflapdwinsize command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnflapdwinsize line-num ds0-num iframe-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfln

cnfln

To configure characteristics for a VISM card line, use the cnfln command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfln line-num line-code line-length clock-source line-type loop-detection

line-length Line length. It can be one of the following values:

???8 = For E1 cards with an SMB back card

???9 = For E1 cards with an RJ48 back card

???10 = 0 to 131 feet, for T1

???11 = 131 to 262 feet, for T1

???12 = 262 to 393 feet, for T1

???13 = 393 to 524 feet, for T1

???14 = 524 to 655 feet, for T1

???15 = More than 655 feet, for T1

clock-source Clock source. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = Loop clock. The loop clock source is from the line specified by the line-num argument. The local clock source is from the MGX 8000 Series platform.

???2 = Local clock. The local clock source is from the MGX 8000 Series platform.

Note Refer to the ???Configuring the PXM and VISM Cards Clocking Source??? section on page 4-14, the ???Expanded Clock Source Selection??? section on page 4-69, and Appendix A, ???VISM and VISM-PR Card Clocking Options,??? for clocking rules.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfln

???1 = DSx1ESF

???2 = DSx1D4

???3 = E1

???4 = E1CRC

???5 = E1MF

???6 = E1MFCRC

???7 = E1 Clear

???8 =

???9 =

loop-detection Loopback code detection. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = Disabled

???2 = Enabled

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

You must add the line indicated by the line-num argument value with the addln command before using this command. You must include all argument values when using this command; however, the line-num and clock-source arguments are the only relevant arguments for configuring the clocking source on your VISM cards.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflndigitorder

cnflndigitorder

To assign the order in which automatic number identification (ANI) digits???the caller???s number???and dialed number identification service (DNIS) digits???the called number???are dialed during an outgoing Feature Group D (FGD) call on the endpoints of a specified VISM card line, use the cnflndigitorder command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnflndigitorder line-num digit-order

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflngain

cnflngain

To configure the adjustable gain for all DS0s on a specified VISM card line, use the cnflngain (Configure Line Gain) command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnflngain line-num input-gain output-atten

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflnis

cnflnis

To configure an out-of-service VISM card line to the in-service state, use the cnflnis command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnflnis line-num

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking

The configured in-service state is not maintained after a VISM card reboot. If you reboot a VISM card previously configured to the in-service state with this command, you must use this command again to configure the associated lines back to the in-service state, as needed.

The following example shows that line 2 is configured with the in-service state:

cnflnis 2

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflnmusicthreshold

cnflnmusicthreshold

To configure the music on-hold threshold for all DS0s on a specified line, use the cnflnmusicthreshold command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnflnmusicthreshold line-num music-thresh

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflnoos

cnflnoos

To configure an in-service VISM card line to the out-of-service state, use the cnflnoos command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnflnoos line-num oos-method

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking

The configured in-service state is not maintained after a VISM card reboot. If you reboot a VISM card previously configured to the out-of-service state with this command, you must use this command again to configure the associated lines back to the out-of-service state, as needed.

The following example shows that line 3 is configured to the out-of-service state gracefully:

cnflnoos 3 3

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflnringback

cnflnringback

To configure the ringback tone method for a specified line on the current VISM card, use the cnflnringback command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

cnflnringback line-num ringb-method

??? 1 = Proxy (Default).

The VISM sends the appropriate packet???Named Signaling Event (NSE), NSE, Network Transmission Element (NTE), or AAL2 type 3???for the ringback tone to the originating VISM which generates the ringback tone toward the TDM network.

??? 2 = Inband.

The VISM generates the inband ringback tone toward the originating VISM over the packet network and the originating VISM plays the ringback tone.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflnringback

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflnsig

cnflnsig

To configure the signaling mode for a VISM card line, use the cnflnsig command in the AAL2 trunking operating mode.

cnflnsig line-num line-signal-type

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

AAL2 trunking

You are required to confirm your entry when using this command to ensure that the signaling type is not changed while endpoints are configured for the line indicated by the line-num argument.

This command is not allowed when CIDs or CCS channels are present.

You must configure the line type as either E1MF or E1MFCRC for E1 lines; otherwise, this command is invalid and does not process.

The following example shows that line 3 is configured for CCS:

cnflnsig 3 2

Command Description

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflntoneplan

cnflntoneplan

To assign a built-in or provisional tone plan to a specified VISM card line, use the cnflntoneplan command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

cnflntoneplan line-num tonep-region tonep-version

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

If you are assigning a provisional tone plan to a VISM card line, you must use the addtoneplan command before you use this command. The command allows you to assign a new tone plan (overwrite a previous configuration) to a VISM card line.

The following example shows that the VISM card line 2 is assigned the tone plan identified by tone plan region sing_3 and tone plan version 2:

cnflntoneplan 2 sing_3 2

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflntoneplan

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflntonetimeout

cnflntonetimeout

To modify the timeout periods of call progress tones supported by VISM on a specified VISM card line, use the cnflntonetimeout command in the VoIP switching/trunking, AAL1 switching, switched AAL2 SVC, switched AAL2 PVC, and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

cnflntonetimeout line-num remote-ringb-tout local-ringb-tout busy-tout reorder-tout dial-tout stutter-tout offhook-tout

Usage Guidelines You can configure timeout periods of the following tones:

???Ringback

???Busy

???Reorder (also known as the fastbusy or the network congestion tone)

???Dial

???Stutter dial

???Offhook alert

Note A tone timeout argument value set to 0 indicates an infinite timeout???the tone will play indefinitely unless it is stopped by an event.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflntrunkcond

cnflntrunkcond

To enable or disable line conditioning on a VISM card line if a network alarm is encountered, use the cnflntrunkcond command in the VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

cnflntrunkcond line-num cond-enable

??? 1 = Enable. VISM performs trunk conditioning on each affected DS0 if an alarm occurs on the ATM side.

??? 2 = Disable. VISM sends an alarm indication signal (AIS), blue alarm, or RAI to the line if an alarm occurs on the ATM side.

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC

Trunk conditioning consists of sending 0x7f or 0xff on the affected DS0s for T1 or E1 respectively. In addition, in the case of T1, the idle code pattern is transmitted for 2 to 5 seconds followed by the seized code pattern, as specified in the cnfcascode command.

This command is not allowed if endpoints or CCS channels are enabled on the line.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflntrunkcond

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfmgcgrpentry

cnfmgcgrpentry

To modify the call agent priority level of a call agent within a call agent redundancy group, use the cnfmgcgrpentry command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfmgcgrpentry mgc-group mgc-num mgc-preference

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfmgcgrpparam

cnfmgcgrpparam

To modify a call agent redundancy group state change notification policy and priority level, use the cnfmgcgrpparam command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfmgcgrpparam mgc-group state-change-notify |mgc-pref|

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfmgcgrpparam

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfmgcgrpprotocol

cnfmgcgrpprotocol

To configure a call agent redundancy group protocol for a previously configured redundancy group, use the cnfmgcgrpprotocol command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL1 SVC, switched AAL2 SVC, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

cnfmgcgrpprotocol red-mgc-group protocol-num |quar-persist default-quar del-negated prov-resp

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfmgcgrpprotocol

disc-proc-enable (Optional) Enables or disables the disconnect method, which indicates that the endpoint has become disconnected and is now trying to establish connectivity. It can be one of the following values:

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL1 SVC, switched AAL2 SVC, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC

Use this command to change the protocol for a redundancy group that has previously been assigned a protocol with the addmgcgrpprotocol command.

The following example shows that redundancy group number 7 is assigned the SRCP 1.0.2 protocol, and quarantines persistent events with the loop, process handling method. All optional arguments are enabled.

cnfmgcgrpprotocol 7 3 1 3 1 1 1 1 1

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfmidcalltimers

cnfmidcalltimers

To configure the midcall dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) feature partial and critical timers for a specified VISM card line, use the cnfmidcalltimers command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfmidcalltimers line-num dtmf-part-timer dtmf-crit-timer

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Use this command for CAS and non-CAS endpoints when you want to use midcall DTMF digit reporting.

When you use this command, the partial digit timer starts when the first digit is entered, and restarts when each new digit is entered until a digit map match or mismatch occurs.

When you use a digit map, the critical digit timer starts when the last digit is received???when no more digits are required for a digit map match. When the time expires, the digit map match is assumed to be complete. When you are not using a digit map, the critical digit timer starts immediately (and not restarted) and is cancelled as soon as a digit is entered.

The following example shows that the current VISM card line number 3 is configured with a 20-second partial digit timer and a 4-second critical digit timer for midcall DTMF digit reporting:

cnfmidcalltimers 3 20 4

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfmusicthreshold

cnfmusicthreshold

To configure the music on-hold threshold value for the current VISM card, use the cnfmusicthreshold command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfmusicthreshold music-thresh

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfnwcot

cnfnwcot

To configure VISM for a gateway-initiated network continuity test, use the cnfnwcot command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

This command configures VISM for gateway-initiated network continuity testing. When enabled, and after VISM receives the remote SDP information, VISM sends an Named Signaling Event (NSE) or AAL2 type 3 packet (CO3) towards the network. If the other gateway does not respond with a NSE/Type 3 packet (CO4), the connection is deleted. VISM interprets that the gateway initiated DLCX, with a reason code of ???Network cont. failed,??? is sent to the call agent.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfpncon

cnfpncon

To set priority routing for a specified connection, use the cnfpncon command in the switched AAL1 SVC, switched AAL2 SVC, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

cnfpncon lcn route-priority

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfprofelemvbd

cnfprofelemvbd

To configure the voiceband data (VBD) profile element for a profile, use the cnfprofelemvbd command in the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode.

cnfprofelemvbd profile-type profile-num vbd-codec-type vbd-pkt-period

???1 = International Telecommunication Union (ITU) I.366.2

???3 = Custom

profile-num Number of the profile. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = ITU profile type

???2 = ITU profile type

???3 = ITU profile type

???7 = ITU profile type

???8 = ITU profile type

???12 = ITU profile type

???100 = custom profile type

???101 = custom profile type

???110 = custom profile type

???200 = custom profile type

vbd-codec-type The type of coding/decoding to be performed on the data stream. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = G.711u

???2 = G.711a

???3 = G.726-32k

???6 = Clear channel (VAD must be off)

???7 = G.726-16k

???8 = G.726-24k

???9 = G.726-40k

???11 = G.723.1-H

???13 = G.723.1-L

vbd-pkt-period Packetization period (defined in milliseconds). It can be one of the following values:

???5

???10

???30

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfprofelemvbd

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Switched AAL2 PVC

Use the dspaal2profile command to identify valid combinations of codec type, packetization period, and silence insertion descriptor.

The G.723.1 codecs are supported for VISM-PR cards and are not supported for VISM cards.

The following example shows that the ITU profile type, profile number 1 is configured with G.711a codec type and a 5-ms packetization period:

cnfprofelemvbd 1 1 2 5

Release 3.0, Part Number OL-2521-01 Rev. D0, June 2004

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfprofelemvoice

cnfprofelemvoice

To configure the profile voice element, use the cnfprofelemvoice command in the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode.

cnfprofelemvoice profile-type profile-num codec-type pvoice-pkt-period sid

Cisco VISM Installation and Configuration Guide

5-191

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfprofelemvoice

pvoice-pkt-period Packetization period (defined in milliseconds). It can be one of the following values:

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Switched AAL2 PVC

Use the dspaal2profile command to identify valid combinations of codec type, packetization period, and SID.

The G.723.1 codecs are supported for VISM-PR cards and are not supported for VISM cards.

The following example shows that the ITU profile type on profile number 1 is configured with the G.711a codec type, a packetization period of 5 ms, and VAD enabled:

cnfprofelemvoice 1 1 2 5 2

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfprofneg

cnfprofneg

To configure the profile list priority order, use the cnfprofneg command in the switched AAL2 PVC operating mode.

cnfprofneg codec-priority

???1 = Local connection options (LCO) list, remote Session Descriptor Protocol (SDP) data list, local MIB

???2 = LCO list, local MIB, remote SDP data list

???3 = Remote SDP data list, LCO list, local MIB

???4 = Remote SDP data list, local MIB, LCO list

???5 = Local MIB, LCO list, remote SDP data list

???6 = Local MIB, remote SDP data list, LCO list

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfprofparams

cnfprofparams

To configure a profile preference, use the cnfprofparams command in the switched AAL2 PVC and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfprofparams profile-type profile-num profile-pref

???1 = International Telecommunication Union (ITU) I.366.2

???3 = Custom

???1 = ITU profile type

???2 = ITU profile type

???3 = ITU profile type

???7 = ITU profile type

???8 = ITU profile type

???12 = ITU profile type

???100 = custom profile types

???101 = custom profile types

???110 = custom profile types

???200 = custom profile types

???0 = No preference; exclude the profile from xGCP profile negotiation

???In the range from 1 (highest preference; default) to 10 (lowest preference)

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfrsvp

cnfrsvp

To configure Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) for a specified connection, use the cnfrsvp command in the VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfrsvprefreshmiss

cnfrsvprefreshmiss

To configure the number of times VISM waits for a missed Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) minimum refresh message???a path or reservation message???(this is in addition to the time configured for minimum refreshes) for a specified connection, use the cnfrsvprefreshmiss command in the VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

cnfrsvprefreshmiss lcn refresh-miss-num

Syntax Description lcnThe logical channel number. It can be in the range from 131 to 510.

refresh-miss-num The successive number of refresh message wait times that VISM allows before deleting the soft-state for the connection. It can be in the range from 1 to 8. (Default = 4)

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

VoIP switching/trunking, VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC

VISM expects refresh messages at regular intervals, which are passed to VISM from the remote packet module (RPM). If no refresh messages are sent to the VISM, VISM deletes the soft-state for the corresponding connection. However, you can use this command to extend the wait time by configuring the number of wait times VISM allows before tearing down a connection.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfrtcprepint

cnfrtcprepint

To configure the Real Time Control Protocol (RTCP) report interval for a VISM card, use the cnfrtcprepint command in the VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

cnfrtcprepint report-interval |report-mult|

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfrtpcon

cnfrtpcon

To modify an existing static Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) VoIP trunking connection, use the cnfrtpcon command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfrtpcon conn-num codec-type conn-mode |vt-pkt-period bearer-prec bearer-tos vad-enable vad-timer ecan-enable cas-trans dtmf-trans idle-code-sup|

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfrtpcon

idle-code-sup (Optional) Enables or disables idle code suppression for the CID. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = On

???2 = Off (Default)

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking

Usage Guidelines The G.723.1 codecs are supported for VISM-PR cards and are not supported for VISM cards.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfrtpcon

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfrtprxtimer

cnfrtprxtimer

To enable or disable the receipt of Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) messages on a VISM card, use the cnfrtprxtimer command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

VoIP switching/trunking

If you enable the receipt of RTP messages (rx-timer = 2) and no RTP messages are received on a particular connection for 5 seconds, the gateway initiates a connection deletion. You cannot configure the 5-second time limit.

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfrudptrunkrmtip

cnfrudptrunkrmtip

To modify the remote IP address of VISM used in the ISDN PRI backhaul Reliable User Datagram Protocol (RUDP) trunk for a specified session, use the cnfrudptrunkrmtip command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfrudptrunkrmtip session-num remote-ip-addr

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfrudptrunkrmtip

CommandDescription

dsprudptrunk Displays the configuration data of a specified ISDN PRI backhaul RUDP session.

dsprudptrunks Displays the configuration data of all ISDN PRI backhaul RUDP sessions.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfsesack

cnfsesack

To configure the timeout period before sending an acknowledgment, and the maximum number of acknowledgments that can be accumulated, use the cnfsesack command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfsesack session-num ack-timeout max-acks

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

VoIP switching/trunking

Use this command for a previously added PRI backhaul session.

The following example shows that session 2 is configured with an acknowledgment period of 500 ms and the maximum number of accumulated acknowledgments can be 10:

cnfsesack 2 500 10

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfsesmaxreset

cnfsesmaxreset

To configure the maximum number of resets that a VISM card performs before a connection is reset, use the cnfsesmaxreset command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfsesmaxreset session-num max-resets

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

VoIP switching/trunking

Use this command for a previously added PRI backhaul session.

The following example shows that 25 is the maximum number of resets configured for session number 2:

cnfsesmaxreset 2 25

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfsesmaxseg

cnfsesmaxseg

To configure the maximum segment size, in octets, that can be received by a VISM card after sending a synchronize message, use the cnfsesmaxseg command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfsesmaxseg session-num seg-size

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

VoIP switching/trunking

Use this command for a previously added PRI backhaul session.

The following example shows that a maximum 1000-octet segment size is configured for session number 2:

cnfsesmaxseg 2 1000

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfsesmaxwindow

cnfsesmaxwindow

To configure the maximum number of segments (window) that can be sent before receiving an acknowledgment, use the cnfsesmaxwindow command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfsesmaxwindow session-num window-size

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

VoIP switching/trunking

Use this command for a previously added PRI backhaul session.

The following example shows that a maximum number of 44 segments can be sent for session number 2 before receiving an acknowledgment:

cnfsesmaxwindow 2 44

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfsesnullsegtmout

cnfsesnullsegtmout

To configure the timeout period, in milliseconds, of idle time before a null segment is sent, use the cnfsesnullsegtmout command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfsesnullsegtmout session-num null-seg-tout

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

VoIP switching/trunking

Use this command for a previously added PRI backhaul session.

The following example shows that the idle timeout period is configured at 1000 ms for session number 2:

cnfsesnullsegtmout 2 1000

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfsesoutofseq

cnfsesoutofseq

To configure the maximum number of out-of-sequence packets that can be accumulated before sending an EACK packet, use the cnfsesoutofseq command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfsesoutofseq session-num max-seq-pkts

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

VoIP switching/trunking

Use this command for a previously added PRI backhaul session.

The following example shows that a maximum of 10 out-of-sequence packets can be accumulated before an EACK packet is transmitted for session number 2:

cnfsesoutofseq 2 10

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfsesport

cnfsesport

To configure the port numbers of a previously added PRI backhaul session, use the cnfsesport command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfsesport session-num local-port-num remote-port-num

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that session number 4 is configured with local (VISM) port number 1200 and remote (call agent) port number 1204:

cnfsesport 4 1200 1204

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfsesretrans

cnfsesretrans

To configure the timeout period for unacknowledged packets and number of retransmissions, use the cnfsesretrans command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfsesretrans session-num unack-timeout max-ses-retrans

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

VoIP switching/trunking

Use this command for a previously added PRI backhaul session.

When the maximum retransmissions have been made and there is still no acknowledgment, the session is considered failed.

The following example shows that session number 2 is configured with a timeout period for unacknowledged packets of 1000 ms and a maximum number of retransmission attempts of 20:

cnfsesretrans 2 1000 20

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfsesstatetmout

cnfsesstatetmout

To configure the number of milliseconds that VISM waits for a transfer state before executing an auto reset, use the cnfsesstatetmout command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfsesstatetmout session-num tstate-tout

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

VoIP switching/trunking

Use this command for a previously added PRI backhaul session.

The following example shows that session number 2 is configured with a 500-ms transfer state timeout:

cnfsesstatetmout 2 500

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfsessyncatmps

cnfsessyncatmps

To configure the maximum number of attempts to synchronize with the call agent, use the cnfsessyncatmps command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfsessyncatmps session-num max-sync-attempts

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

max-sync-attempts The maximum number of attempts to synchronize with the call agent. It can be in the range from 1 to 32.

VoIP switching/trunking

Use this command for a previously added PRI backhaul session.

The following example shows that session number 2 is configured with a maximum of 10 synchronization attempts with the call agent:

cnfsessyncatmps 2 10

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfsrcppeer

cnfsrcppeer

To configure the port for the call agent configured with the Simple Resource Control Protocol (SRCP)???when SRCP is the selected protocol for communication between the VISM card and call agent, use the cnfsrcppeer command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfsrcppeergrpparam

cnfsrcppeergrpparam

To modify the Simple Resource Control Protocol (SRCP) heartbeat interval and maximum User Datagram Protocol (UDP) size for a specified call agent redundancy group, use the cnfsrcppeergrpparam command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfsrcppeergrpparam red-mgc-group hbeat-int max-udp-size

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that call agent redundancy group number 3 is configured with a 250-ms SRCP heartbeat interval and 50000-byte maximum UDP size:

cnfsrcppeergrpparam 3 250 50000

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfsrcppeergrpparam

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfsrcpretry

cnfsrcpretry

To configure the VISM card level Simple Resource Control Protocol (SRCP) retry count, minimum timeout, and maximum timeout, use the cnfsrcpretry command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

cnfsrcpretry srcp-min-tout max-srcp-retries |srcp-max-tout|

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

If you assign a value to the optional srcp-max-tout argument, VISM exponentially increases the timeout value between the minimum and maximum timeouts. If you do not assign a maximum timeout, the srcp-max-tout argument value is set equal to the srcp-min-tout argument value, which disables the exponential back off.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnft38fxlco

cnft38fxlco

To configure the fax handling instructions for a specified line, use the cnft38fxlco command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnft38fxlco line-num fx-lco

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

???1 = VISM controlled T.38, then fax pass through. Upon detecting a fax preamble, VISM first attempts to complete a fax relay on the connection. If fax relay is unsuccessful due to a lack of local resources, T.38 connection admission control (CAC) failure, or the remote side did not acknowledge the 200 Named Signaling Event (NSE), VISM follows the procedure for fax passthrough. If fax relay is successful, the connection is returned to voice mode when the fax end of transfer occurs.

???2 = VISM controlled T.38 only. Upon detecting a fax preamble, VISM attempts to complete a fax relay on the connection. If fax relay is unsuccessful, the connection is returned to voice mode. If the fax relay is successful, the connection is returned to voice mode when the fax end of transfer occurs.

???3 = Passthrough, then VISM controlled T.38. Upon detecting a fax preamble, VISM first attempts the procedure for fax passthrough. If fax passthrough is unsuccessful due to a lack of local resources or an upspeed CAC failure, VISM attempts the fax relay procedure. If both fax passthrough and fax relay fail, the connection is returned to voice mode. If either fax passthrough or fax relay are successful, the connection is returned to voice mode when the fax end of transfer occurs.

???4 = Passthrough only. Upon detecting a fax preamble, VISM attempts the fax passthrough procedure.

???5 = Off.

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the fax preamble response configured for line number 4 is first the fax passthrough and then VISM controlled T.38:

cnft38fxlco 4 3

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnft38fxlco

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnft38nsetimeout

cnft38nsetimeout

To configure a specified line with a length of time in which to wait for a remote acknowledgment of the offer to switch to fax transfer mode, use the cnft38nsetimeout command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnft38nsetimeout line-num nse-ack-timer

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnft38params

cnft38params

To configure the T.38 fax transfer parameters for a specified line, use the cnft38params command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnft38params line-num max-xmit-rate |info-fld-size d-pkt-size ls-data-red hs-data-red tcf-method err-corr-enable nsf-oride-enable nsf-ccode nsf-vendor|

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnft38params

nsf-oride-enable (Optional) VISM nonstandard facilities (NSF) code override of NSF, nonstandard facilities command (NSC), and nonstandard facilities setup (NSS) T.30 signals. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = On (Default)

If you enable NSF override, the group 3 fax machines are prevented from synchronizing with each other on the basis of a protocol other than the ITU-T recommendations.

???2 = Off

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the T.38 fax transfer parameters for a line number 2 are configured with a maximum fax transmission rate of 7200 bps, a fax information field size of 28 bytes, a primary high-speed data packet size of 20 ms, a low-speed packet transmission redundancy of 3, a high-speed packet transmission redundancy of 0, the network TCF verification method, UDP error correction enabled, NFS code VISM override enabled, a country code of 500, and a vendor code of 4000:

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnft38params

cnft38params 2 3 28 20 3 0 2 1 1 500 4000

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnftftpdn

cnftftpdn

To select the Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) domain name, use the cnftftpdn command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnflntrunkcond

cnflntrunkcond

To enable or disable trunk conditioning for a specified VISM card line, use the cnflntrunkcond command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnflntrunkcond line-num trunk-cond-enable

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfvbdcodec

cnfvbdcodec

To configure voiceband data (VBD) upspeed codec on the current VISM card, use the cnfvbdcodec command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfvbdcodec upspeed-codec

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Note

Examples

upspeed-codec Upspeed codec. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = G.711u (Default for T1 VISM cards)

???2 = G.711a (Default for E1 VISM cards)

???3 = G.726-32k

???4 = Clear channel

???5 = G.723.1-H (Valid for template number 4 only)

???6 = G.723.1-L (Valid for template number 4 only)

???7 = G.726-16k

???8 = G.726-24k

???9 = G.726-40k

VoIP switching/trunking

VISM uses the configured codec even if, for example, the configured codec is G.726-32k and VISM is preconfigured with G.711. In this case, an actual downspeed would be performed.

If you configure clear channel, VISM does support a mixed system clock???VISM cannot be originated at a T1 line and terminated at an E1 line, or originated at an E1 line and terminated at a T1 line.

When VISM is configured with clear channel, the codec is not used in the fax/modem upspeed session because VISM cannot detect any tones using clear channel.

AAL2 modes obtain the upspeed codec from the AAL2 profile table. AAL1 does not support compression and therefore does not require upspeed.

The G.723.1 codecs are supported for VISM-PR cards and are not supported for VISM cards.

Cisco recommends that you do not use upspeed-codec argument values 5 or 6 with this command.

The following example shows that the VBD upspeed codec is configured as G.711u:

cnfvbdcodec 1

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfvbdpol

cnfvbdpol

To configure VISM card level voiceband data (VBD) policies???fax/modem carrier loss and fax/modem upspeed connection admission control (CAC) failure???use the cnfvbdpol command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfvbdpol carrier-loss-pol cac-reject-pol

???1 = Revert to the previous codec

???2 = Maintain the upspeed codec

cac-reject-pol CAC rejection policy. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = Delete the connection

???2 = Maintain the connection

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfvismdn

cnfvismdn

To configure the current VISM card domain name, use the cnfvismdn command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Ensure that you configure the same domain name for the VSC as you do for the VISM card.

The domain name you configure is used when you create an endpoint identification number for each endpoint on a VISM card. The endpoint identification number is used to address SGCP/MGCP commands to a specific endpoint.

If you do not use this command, the default domain name is used.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfvismip

cnfvismip

To configure the current VISM card control IP address and subnet mask, and optionally, the bearer IP address and subnet mask, use the cnfvismip command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

cnfvismip vip-addr netmask |bearer-ipaddr bearer-netmask|

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfvismmode

cnfvismmode

To configure the initial operating mode for a VISM card, use the cnfvismmode command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfvismmode oper-mode

???1 = VoIP switching/VoIP trunking

???2 = ATM Adaptation Layer Type 2 (AAL2) trunking

???3 = Switched ATM AAL1 switched virtual circuit (SVC)

???7 = Switched ATM AAL2 SVC

???8 = Switched ATM AAL2 permanent virtual circuit (PVC)

???9 = VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfvoiptimerparam

cnfvoiptimerparam

To configure the holdover time for voice activity detection (VAD) before silence compression is activated, use the cnfvoiptimerparam command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfvoiptimerparam vad-timer

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfvoiptransparams

cnfvoiptransparams

To configure the VoIP transportation parameters???enable dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) and channel associated signaling (CAS) bits transportation to the other endpoint, configure the Named Signaling Event (NSE) triple redundancy feature for NSE packets, and optionally configure the event negotiation policy and silence insertion descriptor (SID) payload type???use the cnfvoiptransparams command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfvoiptransparams dtmf-trans cas-trans |event-neg-enable event-neg-pol sid-type|

event-neg-enable (Optional) Enables or disables whether VISM should negotiate how to send events. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = On. Attempt to negotiate how to send events.

???2 = Off. Do not attempt to negotiate how to send events.

event-neg-pol (Optional) Event negotiation policy. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = None. Call agent driven.

???2 = Proprietary (Default). Call agent driven and VISM proprietary events.

???3 = All. Call agent driven and all event codecs specified by VISM.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfvoiptransparams

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfxgcpbt

cnfxgcpbt

To configure a default bearer type???if one is not specified by the call agent by the xGCP local connection options???for the current VISM card, use the cnfxgcpbt command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

cnfxgcpbt network-type vc-type aal-conn-type

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

network-type Network type. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = IP

???2 = ATM

???1 = Permanent virtual circuit (PVC)

???2 = Switched virtual circuit (SVC)

aal-conn-type Connection type. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = ATM Adaptation Layer Type 1 (AAL1)

???2 = ATM Adaptation Layer Type 2 (AAL2)

???3 = Not applicable

Note You must select 3 (not applicable) if you selected a network-type argument value of 1 (IP).

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

If the default bearer types (network, VC, or connection) are specified as part of the local connection options, those types take precedence over the types specified in this command.

The following example shows that the current VISM card is configured for the IP network type and for PVC:

cnfxgcpbt 1 1 3

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfxgcpinteropsdpost

cnfxgcpinteropsdpost

To enable or disable the Session Descriptor Protocol (SDP) OST interoperability in the call control protocol, use the cnfxgcpinteropsdpost command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfxgcpinteropsdpost sdp-ost-enable

dspxgcpinterops Displays the SDP OST interoperability feature configuration.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfxgcpmwd

cnfxgcpmwd

To configure the maximum waiting delay (MWD) value used for sending a Restart in Progress (RSIP) message to the call agent, use the cnfxgcpmwd command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

cnfxgcpmwd max-wait-delay

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking

Use this command to limit the number of RSIP messages sent to the call agent when an MGX 8000 Series platform configured with multiple VISM cards is started or reset. Each VISM card waits a random amount of time (up to a maximum specified by this command) before sending an RSIP message.

The following example shows that the maximum waiting delay time to send RSIP messages to the call agent is 300 ms:

cnfxgcpmwd 300

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfxgcppeer

cnfxgcppeer

To configure the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port number used to send gateway-initiated messages to the call agent, use the cnfxgcppeer command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

cnfxgcppeer mgc-num protocol-num remote-udp-pnum

remote-udp-pnum UDP port number. In the range from 1025 to 65535. (Default = 2427)

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

cnfxgcpretry

cnfxgcpretry

To configure VISM minimum and maximum request timeouts and retransmission attempts for communication with the associated call agent, use the cnfxgcpretry command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

cnfxgcpretry min-vtoca-tout vtoca-retrans-num |max-vtoca-tout|

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

If you indicate a value for the optional max-vtoca-tout argument, VISM exponentially increases the timeout value between the minimum and maximum timeouts. If a maximum value is not specified, the max-vtoca-tout value is set equal to the min-vtoca-tout value, which disables the exponential backoff.

The following example shows that VISM will wait a minimum time of 1000 ms and a maximum time of 2000 ms for an acknowledgment message from the call agent, and three call agent retransmission attempts will occur before VISM is determined to be unreachable:

cnfxgcpretry 1000 3 2000

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delannalldynamic

delannalldynamic

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To delete all announcement files and their associated codec types from the temporary announcement files currently saved in the VISM card, use the delannalldynamic command in the VoIP switching operating mode.

delannalldynamic

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching

This command does not report an error if no announcement files are found.

The following example shows that all announcement files and their associated codec types are deleted from the temporary announcement files currently saved in the VISM card:

delannalldynamic

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delannalldynamic

dspannpathprefix Displays the main prefix directory path from which VISM retrieves announcement files from the announcement file server.

dspannpermanents Displays all available permanent announcement files with their associated codec types and identifying index numbers.

dspannprefcodec Displays the codec type used for announcements played on unconnected TDM endpoints.

dspannreqtimeout Displays the expiration time for announcements to begin playing before being aborted.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delanndynamic

delanndynamic

To delete an announcement file and associated codec type from the temporary announcement files currently saved in the VISM card, use the delanndynamic command in the VoIP switching operating mode.

delanndynamic ann-filename codec-type

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

ann-filename Announcement file filename. It can be from 1 to 64 alphanumeric characters, including the following symbols???period (.), forward slash (/), underscore (_), and hyphen (-).

VoIP switching

This command does not report an error if the requested file identified by the ann-filename argument is not found.

The G.723.1 codecs are supported for VISM-PR cards and are not supported for VISM cards.

The following example shows that the femalezero1 announcement file and its associated codec type of G.726-40k is deleted from the temporary announcement files currently saved in the VISM card:

delanndynamic femalezero1 9

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delanndynamic

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delannpermanent

delannpermanent

To delete a permanent announcement file and its associated codec type from the announcement file server, use the delannpermanent command in the VoIP switching operating mode.

delannpermanent pann-index

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Use the dspannpermanents command to display a list of available permanent announcement server file names.

The following example shows that the permanent announcement server file and its associated codec type identified by the announcement server file identification index number 19 is deleted from the announcement file server:

delannpermanent 19

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delannpermanent

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delccs

delccs

To delete the association between a common channel signaling (CCS) DS0 channel and the corresponding virtual channel, use the delccs command in the AAL2 trunking operating mode.

delccs line-num ds0-num

Usage Guidelines The original association is configured with the addccs command.

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delcid

delcid

To delete the association between an endpoint and an LCN/CID pair, use the delcid command in the AAL2 trunking operating mode.

delcid lcn cid-num

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

cid-num The channel identification number of the LCN/CID pair in the range from 8 to 255.

AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the endpoint association for LCN 140 and CID 12 is deleted:

delcid 140 12

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delcon

delcon

To delete a PVC between a VISM card and an MGX 8000 Series shelf PXM card, use the delcon command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

delcon lcn

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

You cannot delete a connection if it is protected or if CIDs are present.

The following example shows that the PVC connection for LCN 140 is deleted:

delcon 140

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delconloop

delconloop

To delete a local loopback state on a connection to the cellbus, use the delconloop command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

deldn

deldn

To delete a domain name, use the deldn command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

deldn domain-name-num

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

domain-name-num Domain name number. It can be in the range from 1 to 11.

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

If the domain name you want to delete is the last entry in the domain table and if the domain name exists in the list of call agents that VISM maintains (as displayed by the dspmgcs command), deletion is not allowed.

You must manually delete all statistically provisioned IP addresses for the domain name before you can delete the domain name.

You should not delete a domain name if it is used as one of the following:

???Media Gateway Controller (MGC)

???Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server

???Domain name server (DNS)

???Announcement server

The following example shows that the domain name represented by domain name number 12 is deleted:

deldn 12

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

deldnip

deldnip

To delete a statistically provisioned IP address of a domain name, use the deldnip command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

deldnip resol-num

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

You cannot delete IP addresses that use external resolution of the domain name. You should not delete the last IP address of a given domain name if it is used as one of the following:

???Media Gateway Controller (MGC)

???Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server

???Domain name server (DNS)

???Announcement server

The following example shows that the IP address associated with the resolution number 46 is deleted from a domain name:

deldnip 46

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delendpt

delendpt

To delete a specified endpoint on a VISM card line, use the delendpt command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

delendpt endpt-num

???For template number 1:

???For VISM, from 1 to 145

???For VISM-PR T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM-PR E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 2:

???For VISM T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 3:

???For VISM, from 1 to 120

???For VISM-PR T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM-PR E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 4:

???For VISM-PR, from 1 to 144

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

An endpoint cannot be deleted if CIDs are present.

This command results in a graceful transition to out of service and an RSIP to be sent to each associated call agent indicating the endpoint out-of-service state.

The following example shows that endpoint number 120 is deleted:

delendpt 120

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delendptloop

delendptloop

To take an endpoint out of the loopback condition, use the delendptloop command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

addendptloop Places an endpoint in the loopback condition in the TDM direction.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delendpts

delendpts

To delete a range of consecutive endpoints on a VISM card, use the delendpts command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

delendpts start-endpt endpt-quantity

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delendpts

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

This command results in a graceful transition to the out-of-service state for each deleted endpoint and an RSIP to be sent to each associated call agent indicating the out-of-service state of the endpoints.

If the specified range of endpoints to be deleted contains gaps, the gaps are not counted. For example, if the current endpoints are 3, 4, 7, 8, 9 10, 11,12 and the command specifies a start at 4 and a number of 5, the endpoints deleted are 4, 7, 8, 9, and 10.

The following example shows that 10 endpoints are deleted, starting with endpoint number 120:

delendpts 120 10

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dellapd

dellapd

To delete an Link Access Protocol D channel (LAPD), use the dellapd command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dellapdtrunk

dellapdtrunk

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To delete a Link Access Protocol D channel (LAPD) configured line, use the dellapdtrunk command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dellapdtrunk line-num

VoIP switching/trunking

You must use the dellapd command to delete the corresponding LAPD channel before you can delete the LAPD trunk.

The following example shows that the LAPD configured line, line number 7, is deleted:

dellapdtrunk 7

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dellapdtrunk

dsprudptrunk Displays the configuration data of a specified ISDN PRI backhaul RUDP session.

dsprudptrunks Displays the configuration data of all ISDN PRI backhaul RUDP sessions.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delln

delln

To delete a DS1 line on a VISM card, use the delln command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

delln ds1-num

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

ds1-num Physical line number in the range from 1 to 8.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

You must delete endpoints and CCS channels from the line before the line can be deleted.

The following example shows that line number 4 is deleted:

delln 4

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dellnloop

dellnloop

To delete the T1 or E1 local line loopback state for a VISM card, use the dellnloop command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dellntoneplan

dellntoneplan

To delete a built-in or provisional tone plan configuration from a specified VISM card line, use the dellntoneplan command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delmgc

delmgc

To delete a call agent from a VISM card???s list of configured call agents, use the delmgc command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delmgcgrpentry

delmgcgrpentry

To delete a call agent from a call agent redundancy group, use the delmgcgrpentry command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

delmgcgrpentry mgc-group mgc-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delmgcgrpprotocol

delmgcgrpprotocol

To delete a Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) from a specified call agent redundancy group, use the delmgcgrpprotocol command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

delmgcgrpprotocol mgc-group protocol-num

In the range from 6 to 8, as displayed by the dspmgcgrpprotocols command.

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that protocol number 2 is deleted from call agent redundancy group number 3:

delmgcgrpprotocol 3 2

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delmgcgrpprotocol

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delport

delport

To delete the VISM port on the packet network side, use the delport command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

delport

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Caution

Examples

Related Commands

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

You should execute this command before you remove the VISM card.

If you remove a VISM card with an undeleted port, subsequent cards inserted into the same slot may not operate correctly. You should delete the resource partition and all PVCs before deleting the port.

When you use this command, the entry with the following port numbers is deleted in the following manner:

???Entry 1 is deleted from a PXM1 card

???Entry 255 is deleted from a PXM1E card

The following example shows that the VISM port on the packet network side is deleted:

delport

Command Description

dspport Displays data about the virtual port that was created using the addport command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delrscprtn

delrscprtn

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delrtpcon

delrtpcon

To delete a static Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) VoIP trunking connection, use the delrtpcon command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

delrtpcon conn-num

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the static RTP connection number 200 is deleted:

delrtpcon 200

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delrtpcon

dsprudptrunk Displays the configuration data of a specified ISDN PRI backhaul RUDP session.

dsprudptrunks Displays the configuration data of all ISDN PRI backhaul RUDP sessions.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delrudptrunk

delrudptrunk

To delete an ISDN PRI backhaul Reliable User Datagram Protocol (RUDP) session that is associated with a Link Access Protocol D channel (LAPD), use the delrudptrunk command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

delrudptrunk session-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delrudptrunk

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delses

delses

To delete a PRI backhaul session, use the delses command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating mode.

delses session-num

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

session-num Identifying session number in the range from 1 to 64.

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that session number 3 is deleted:

delses 3

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delsesgrp

delsesgrp

To delete a PRI backhaul session group, use the delsesgrp command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating mode.

delsesgrp group-num

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

group-num Identifying session group number in the range from 1 to 16.

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

You must delete all sessions in the session group before you use this command to delete the session group.

The following example shows that session group number 2 is deleted:

delsesgrp 2

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delsesset

delsesset

To delete a PRI backhaul session set, use the delsesset command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating mode.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

deltoneplan

deltoneplan

To delete a provisional tone plan from the system, use the deltoneplan command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

deltoneplan tonep-region tonep-version

dsptonebuiltinplans Displays all preconfigured (built-in) tone plans on the current VISM card.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

deltoneplan

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delxgcpcon

delxgcpcon

To delete an xGCP connection specified by the xGCP connection identification number, use the delxgcpcon command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating mode.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

delxgcppersistevt

delxgcppersistevt

To delete a persistent xGCP event, use the delxgcppersistevt command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

delxgcppersistevt event-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dncon

dncon

To configure a specified connection down, preventing traffic from being passed to the specified connection, use the dncon command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL1 SVC, switched AAL2 SVC, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

dncon lcn

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspaal2params

dspaal2params

To display AAL2 configuration parameters, use the dspaal2params command in the switched AAL2 PVC and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspaal2params

cnfaal2timerparams Configures the holdover time for VAD before activating silence suppression on an AAL2 PVC.

cnfaal2transparams Configures the transportation of DTMF and CAS bits to another endpoint and enables or disables the type 3 packet triple redundancy feature.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspaal2profile

dspaal2profile

To display data about a specified AAL2 profile type and profile number, use the dspaal2profile command in the AAL2 trunking operating mode.

dspaal2profile profile-type profile-num

???1 = International Telecommunication Union (ITU) I.366.2

???3 = Custom

profile-num Number of the profile. It can be one of the following values:

???1 = ITU profile type

???2 = ITU profile type

???3 = ITU profile type

???7 = ITU profile type

???8 = ITU profile type

???12 = ITU profile type

???100 = custom profile types

???101 = custom profile types

???110 = custom profile types

???200 = custom profile types

Usage Guidelines The AAL2 profiles correspond to the profile types ITU and ATMF as defined in the ITU-T I.366.2 and ATM forum AF-VTOA-0113 standards respectively.

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspalm

dspalm

To display the alarms associated with a specified line, use the dspalm command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspalm -ds1 line-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspalmcnf

dspalmcnf

To display the threshold data about the alarm statistics being collected, use the dspalmcnf command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspalmcnf -ds1 line-num

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspalmcnf

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspalmcnt

dspalmcnt

To display alarm counters and statistics, use the dspalmcnt command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL1 SVC, switched AAL2 SVC, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

dspalmcnt -ds1 line-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspalmcnt

RcvOOFCount:1

RcvRAICount:0

RcvFECount:97997379

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspalms

dspalms

To display the alarms for a specified VISM card line type, use the dspalms command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspalms line-type

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

line-type Line type, -ds1 = T1 or E1 lines.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the alarms for the T1 line type are displayed:

dspalms -ds1

Line AlarmState StatisticalAlarmState

--------------- ---------------------

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspannagetime

dspannagetime

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspannagetime

dspannpathprefix Displays the main prefix directory path from which VISM retrieves announcement files from the announcement file server.

dspannpermanents Displays all available permanent announcement files with their associated codec types and identifying index numbers.

dspannprefcodec Displays the codec type used for announcements played on unconnected TDM endpoints.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspanncache

dspanncache

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display all available temporary announcement file names, and associated age times before being refreshed from the announcement file server, contained in the current VISM card, use the dspanncache command in the VoIP switching operating mode.

dspanncache

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the temporary announcement file names zero and one are each configured with an age time of 1000 minutes:

dspanncache

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspanncache

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspanncontrols

dspanncontrols

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display a summary list of all provisionable announcement file variables, including variables associated with all announcement file CLI commands, use the dspanncontrols command in the VoIP switching operating mode.

dspanncontrols

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows a summary list of all provisionable announcement file variables:

dspanncontrols

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspanncontrols

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspanndn

dspanndn

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspanndn

dspannpathprefix Displays the main prefix directory path from which VISM retrieves announcement files from the announcement file server.

dspannpermanents Displays all available permanent announcement files with their associated codec types and identifying index numbers.

dspannprefcodec Displays the codec type used for announcements played on unconnected TDM endpoints.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspannpathprefix

dspannpathprefix

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspannpathprefix

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspannpermanents

dspannpermanents

To display all available permanent announcement files with their associated codec types and identifying index numbers, use the dspannpermanents command in the VoIP switching operating mode.

dspannpermanents

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspannpermanents

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspannprefcodec

dspannprefcodec

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspannprefcodec

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspannreqtimeout

dspannreqtimeout

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspannreqtimeout

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcacfailcntrs

dspcacfailcntrs

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the connection admission control (CAC) failure counters that are set to 0, use the dspcacfailcntrs command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspcacfailcntrs

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Use this command for debugging purposes???to reset counters and isolate VISM CAC-related failures. Counter values greater than 0 indicate that the gateway is low on resources.

The following example shows that the CAC failure counters that are set to 0 are displayed:

dspcacfailcntrs

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcalea

dspcalea

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcarddsp

dspcarddsp

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display all card level configuration parameters for both echo cancellation (ECAN) and voice compression DSPs, use the dspcarddsp command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspcarddsp

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

The packetization period and default type of service parameters apply to the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode only.

The following example shows that the card level configuration parameters for ECAN and voice compression DSPs are displayed:

dspcarddsp

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcasendpts

dspcasendpts

To display data about configured channel associated signaling (CAS) endpoints, use the dspcasendpts command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspcasendpts

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Endptds0Num CasVarName CasOnTime CasOffTime

----------- ---------- --------- ---------

Related Commands CommandDescription

dspcasvarendpts Displays all endpoints associated with a specified CAS variant name.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcasglareattrib

dspcasglareattrib

To display the direction of channel associated signaling (CAS) calls and the glare policy for a specified endpoint, use the dspcasglareattrib command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspcasglareattrib endpt-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcasglareattrib

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcaspackage

dspcaspackage

To display the Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) packages configured to notify persistent observed CAS events in the context of incoming and outgoing CAS calls on a specified endpoint, use the dspcaspackage command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspcaspackage endpt-num

incoming CAS Pkg: MS

Outgoing CAS Pkg: DT

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcaspackage

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcasparamsource

dspcasparamsource

To display the currently configured timer source parameters for channel associated signaling (CAS) of a specified endpoint, use the dspcasparamsource command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspcasparamsource endpt-num

Ds0IfIndex: 1

CasParameterSource: MibValue

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcastimers

dspcastimers

To display the currently configured channel associated signaling (CAS) timers for a specified endpoint, use the dspcastimers command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcastimers

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcasvar

dspcasvar

To display data about channel associated signaling (CAS) variants for a given variant name, use the dspcasvar command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspcasvar var-name

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

var-name Name of the CAS variant; a text string of 1 to 64 alphanumeric characters.

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command

The following example shows that the CAS variant data for the CAS variant identified by the name first is displayed:

dspcasvar first

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcasvarendpts

dspcasvarendpts

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display all endpoints associated with a specified channel associated signaling (CAS) variant name, use the dspcasvarendpts command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating mode.

dspcasvarendpts var-name

var-name Name of the CAS variant; a text string of 1 to 64 alphanumeric characters.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the endpoints associated with the var1 CAS variant are displayed:

dspcasvarendpts var1

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcasvars

dspcasvars

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the parameters of all channel associated signaling (CAS) variants configured on a VISM card, use the dspcasvars command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspcasvars

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

This command displays the following data for each CAS variant:

???Variant name

???File name

???Digit method

???Country code

The following example shows that the parameters of all configured CAS variants are displayed for the current VISM card:

dspcasvars

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcasxgcps

dspcasxgcps

To display timer parameters for the channel associated signaling/gateway control protocol (CAS/xGCP) backhaul, use the dspcasxgcps command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspcasxgcps

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspccs

dspccs

To display the configuration data of a previously added common channel signaling (CCS) channel, use the dspccs command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspccs line-num ds0-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspccschans

dspccschans

To display all channels that are configured as common channel signaling (CCS) channels, use the dspccschans command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspccschans

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspccscnt

dspccscnt

To display the common channel signaling (CCS) counter values for a specified line and DS0, use the dspccscnt command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspccscnt line-num ds0-num

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcd

dspcd

To display the current VISM card???s configuration, status, and hardware and firmware configuration data, use the dspcd command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspcd

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcds

dspcds

To display a list of chassis card types, with associated slot numbers, card status, alarm status, and redundancy status, use the dspcds command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspcds

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcid

dspcid

To display the configuration data of an AAL2 channel identifier (CID) on the current VISM card, use the dspcid command in the switched AAL2 PVC and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspcid lcn cid-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcids

dspcids

To display all AAL2 channel identifiers (CIDs) for an LCN on the current VISM card, use the dspcids command in the switched AAL2 PVC and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspcid Displays the configuration data of an AAL2 CID on the current VISM card.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspco4timer

dspco4timer

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcodecjtrdelays

dspcodecjtrdelays

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcodecparams

dspcodecparams

To display codec parameters, use the dspcodecparams command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Note

Examples

dspcodecparams

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking

The following data, codec parameters, are displayed when you use this command:

???Codec type

???xGCP codec string

???Packetization period

???Preference

???IANA registered codec type

Because the preference of any codec can be configured regardless of the current codec template, all codecs displayed by this command may not be available in the current codec template.

The following example shows that the codec parameters are displayed:

dspcodecparams

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcodectmpls

dspcodectmpls

To display all entries in the codec template table, use the dspcodectmpls command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspcodectmpls

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines VISM maintains a table of codec templates; each entry in the table contains the following:

???Codec template number

???Codecs supported

???Maximum number of DS0s supported by the template

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcon

dspcon

To display the configuration data of a channel, use the dspcon command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspconcac

dspconcac

To display connection admission control (CAC) configuration data for a connection, use the dspconcac command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspconcnt

dspconcnt

To display counter configuration data (channel state) of a connection, use the dspconcnt command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspcons

dspcons

To display channel configuration data for all configured connections on a VISM card, use the dspcons command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspcons

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspconvbdpol

dspconvbdpol

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display fax/modem upspeed, connection admission control (CAC) failure, and fax/modem carrier loss policies for calls added to a particular IP or AAL2 logical channel number (LCN), use the dspconvbdpol command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspconvbdpol

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the voiceband data policies for LCN 131 are displayed:

dspconvbdpol 131

LcnNumer:131

ChanCarrierLossPolicy: upspeedCodec

ChanCacRejectionPolicy: delete

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspdisctimers

dspdisctimers

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the Restart in Progress command disconnect type method wait delay times, use the dspdisctimers command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL1 SVC, switched AAL2 SVC, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

dspdisctimers

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL1 SVC, switched AAL2 SVC, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the Restart in Progress command disconnect type method wait delay times are displayed:

dspdisctimers

Initial Waiting Delay: 15secs

Min Waiting Delay: 15 secs

Nax Waiting Delay: 600 secs

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspdnallips

dspdnallips

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display all statistically provisioned IP addresses and externally resolved IP addresses for all domain names configured on the current VISM card, use the dspdnallips command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspdnallips

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that all statistically provisioned IP addresses and externally resolved IP addresses for all domain names configured on the current VISM card are displayed:

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspdnips

dspdnips

To display all statistically provisioned and externally resolved IP addresses configured for a specified domain name, use the dspdnips command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspdnips domain-name

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspdns

dspdns

To display the configuration data of all domain names of a call agent, use the dspdns command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspdns

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspdnssrvr

dspdnssrvr

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspdpvcoamparams

dspdpvcoamparams

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the transmitted and received permanent virtual circuit (PVC) operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) cell parameters, use the dspdpvcoamparams command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspdpvcoamparams

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the transmitted and received PVC OAM cell parameters are displayed:

dspdpvcoamparams

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspds0gain

dspds0gain

To display the adjustable gain values for a specified DS0, use the dspds0gain command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspds0gain line-num ds0-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspds0localcasstatus

dspds0localcasstatus

To display the currently configured local channel associated signaling (CAS) status for a specified line and DS0, use the dspds0localcasstatus command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspds0localcasstatus line-num ds0-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspds0loop

dspds0loop

To display the loopback type for a specified line and DS0, use the dspds0loop command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspds0loop line-num ds0-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspds0musicthreshold

dspds0musicthreshold

To display the music on-hold threshold value for a specified DS0, use the dspds0musicthreshold command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspds0musicthreshold line-num ds0-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspendpt

dspendpt

To display configuration data of a specified VISM card endpoint, use the dspendpt command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspendpt endpt-num

???For template number 1:

???For VISM, from 1 to 145

???For VISM-PR T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM-PR E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 2:

???For VISM T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 3:

???For VISM, from 1 to 120

???For VISM-PR T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM-PR E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 4:

???For VISM-PR, from 1 to 144

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspendpt

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspendpts

dspendpts

To display configuration data about all endpoints on a VISM card, use the dspendpts command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspendpts

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspgain

dspgain

To display the adjustable gain for a specified VISM card, use the dspgain command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspgain

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspgwstate

dspgwstate

To display the current user-configured service state of the gateway, use the dspgwstate in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspgwstate

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplapd

dsplapd

To display configuration data about a Link Access Protocol D channel (LAPD), use the dsplapd command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplapd

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplapds

dsplapds

To display configuration data about all Link Access Protocol for ISDN D channels (LAPDs), use the dsplapds command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dsplapds

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplapdstat

dsplapdstat

To display configuration data about Link Access Protocol for ISDN D channel (LAPD) statistics (counters) for a specific line and DS0, use the dsplapdstat command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dsplapdstat line-num ds0-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplapdstat

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplapdtrunkpvc

dsplapdtrunkpvc

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the assigned permanent virtual circuit (PVC) trunk type that carries Link Access Protocol D channel (LAPD) trunk messages for the current VISM card, use the dsplapdtrunkpvc command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dsplapdtrunkpvc

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the control PVC trunk type carries LAPD trunk messages for the current VISM card:

dsplapdtrunkpvc

Lapd Trunk PVC Carrier: Control

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplapdtrunkpvc

dsprudptrunk Displays the configuration data of a specified ISDN PRI backhaul RUDP session.

dsprudptrunks Displays the configuration data of all ISDN PRI backhaul RUDP sessions.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplapdtrunks

dsplapdtrunks

To display the data of all Link Access Protocol D channel (LAPD) configured trunks, use the dsplapdtrunks command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dsplapdtrunks

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplapdtrunks

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplinecasbits

dsplinecasbits

To display the currently transmitted and received channel associated signaling (CAS) bit values for all the endpoints on a VISM card line, use the dsplinecasbits command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplinecasbits

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspln

dspln

To display the configuration data of a VISM card line, use the dspln command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplncids

dsplncids

To display the channel identification (CID), endpoint, and AAL2 configuration data for a VISM card line, use the dsplncids command in the switched AAL2 PVC and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplndigitorder

dsplndigitorder

To display the order in which automatic number identification (ANI) digits???the caller???s number???and dialed number identification service (DNIS) digits???the called number???are dialed during an outgoing Feature Group D (FGD) call on the endpoints of a specified VISM card line, use the dsplndigitorder command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dsplndigitorder line-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplndsp

dsplndsp

To display the digital signal processor (DSP) data for a specified T1 or E1 line, use the dsplndsp command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplndsx0s

dsplndsx0s

To display the configuration data of all DS0s on a specified T1 or E1 line, use the dsplndsx0s command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplndsx0s

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplnendptstatus

dsplnendptstatus

To display the status of endpoints for a specified T1 or E1 line, use the dsplnendptstatus command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating mode.

dsplnendptstatus line-num

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

dspendpts Displays information about all the endpoints on a VISM card.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplngain

dsplngain

To display the adjustable gain for all DS0s on a specified VISM card line, use the dsplngain command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplnmusicthreshold

dsplnmusicthreshold

To display the music on-hold threshold values for the DS0s on a specified line, use the dsplnmusicthreshold command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dsplnmusicthreshold line-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplnringback

dsplnringback

To display the ringback tone method for a specified line on the current VISM card, use the dsplnringback command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

Usage Guidelines The ringback tone method is displayed as one of the following:

???Proxy???VISM sends the appropriate packet (NSE, NTE, or AAL2 type 3) for the ringback tone to the originating VISM which generates the ringback tone toward the TDM network.

???Inband???VISM generates the inband ringback tone toward the originating VISM over the packet network and the originating VISM plays the ringback tone.

dsptonebuiltinplans Displays all preconfigured (built-in) tone plans on the current VISM card.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplnringback

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplns

dsplns

To display all line configuration data for the current VISM card, use the dsplns command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dsplns

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplnstate

dsplnstate

To display the service state of specified T1 or E1 line with respect to the xGCP protocol, use the dsplnstate command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

Usage Guidelines Service states are expressed as administrative or operational. For each service state there is an actual state and an effective state. The actual states are described in the following list:

???Actual administrative states:

???In service

???Pending out of service

???Command out of service

???Inactive

???Invalid state

???Actual operational states:

???Alarm

???OK

The effective administrative state is the combination state of the gateway and the line.

The effective operational state is the combination alarm state of the gateway and the line.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplntoneplan

dsplntoneplan

To display the tone plan configuration of a specified VISM card line, use the dsplntoneplan command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dsptonebuiltinplans Displays all preconfigured (built-in) tone plans on the current VISM card.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplntoneplan

dsptoneprovplans Displays all user-added (provisional) tone plans.

dsptoneregionplans Displays a list of all tone plans for the countries and regions whose name partially or completely matches the name you supply.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplntonetimeout

dsplntonetimeout

To display the configured timeout periods for all call progress tones of a specified VISM card line, use the dsplntonetimeout command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dsplntonetimeout line-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsplntonetimeout

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsploops

dsploops

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspmaxmgcs

dspmaxmgcs

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the maximum number of Media Gateway Controllers (MGCs) that can be configured on the current card, use the dspmaxmgcs command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspmaxmgcs

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the maximum number of MGCs that can be configured on the current card is displayed:

dspmaxmgcs

Maximum number of MGCs: 8

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspmgcgrpparams

dspmgcgrpparams

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display all configured Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP)???call agent???redundancy group parameters, use the dspmgcgrpparams command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspmgcgrpparams

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that all configured call agent redundancy group parameters are displayed:

dspmgcgrpparams

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspmgcgrpprotocols

dspmgcgrpprotocols

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display all configured Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP)???call agent???redundancy group protocols, use the dspmgcgrpprotocols command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspmgcgrpprotocols

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that all configured call agent redundancy group protocols are displayed:

dspmgcgrpprotocols

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspmgcgrps

dspmgcgrps

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display all configured Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP)???call agent???redundancy groups, use the dspmgcgrps command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspmgcgrps

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that all configured call agent redundancy groups are displayed:

dspmgcgrps

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspmgcs

dspmgcs

dspmaxmgcs Displays the maximum number of MGCs that can be configured on the current card.

dspmgc Displays the configuration data of a specified configured call agent.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspmgprotocols

dspmgprotocols

To display data of all call agent???Media Gateway Control (MGC)???protocols available to VISM, use the dspmgprotocols command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspmgprotocols

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspmidcalltimers

dspmidcalltimers

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the configured partial and critical timer values for midcall dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) digit reporting, use the dspmidcalltimers command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspmidcalltimers

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the configured partial and critical timers for midcall DTMF digit reporting are displayed:

dspmidcalltimers

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspmngcidcnt

dspmngcidcnt

To display the managed channel identifier (CID) count for a specified endpoint, use the dspmngcidcnt command in the switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspmngcidcnt

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspmonecanendpt

dspmonecanendpt

To monitor the echo cancellation (ECAN) activity for a specified endpoint, use the dspmonecanendpt command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspmonecanendpt endpt-num

???For template number 1:

???For VISM, from 1 to 145

???For VISM-PR T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM-PR E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 2:

???For VISM T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 3:

???For VISM, from 1 to 120

???For VISM-PR T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM-PR E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 4:

???For VISM-PR, from 1 to 144

cnfendptcadence Configures cadence (digit tone) times for an endpoint.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspmusicthreshold

dspmusicthreshold

To display the music on-hold threshold values for the current VISM card, use the dspmusicthreshold command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspmusicthreshold

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspnwcot

dspnwcot

dspvismparam Displays the current VISM card configuration.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspport

dspport

To display configuration data about the virtual port that you created with the addport command, use the dspport command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspport

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspprofparams

dspprofparams

To display the profile elements and the preference for all profiles, use the dspprofparams command in the switched AAL2 PVC and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspprofparams

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes Switched AAL2 PVC and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines When you execute this command, the display includes the default voice and voiceband data profile element which correspond to each supported profile.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspprofparams

Related Commands CommandDescription

cnfprofelemvbd Configures the VBD profile element for a profile.

cnfprofelemvoice Configures the voice profile element for a profile.

cnfprofparams Configures a profile preference.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprscprtn

dsprscprtn

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display configuration data about the resource partition which you created with the addrscprtn command, use the dsprscprtn command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dsprscprtn

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the configuration data of the resource partition created with the addrscprtn command is displayed:

dsprscprtn

vismResPartPortNum:1

vismResPartCtrlrNum: par

vismResPartRowStatus: add

vismResPartNumOfLcnAvail: 72

vismResPartLcnLow:32

vismResPartLcnHigh:279

vismResPartIngrPctBW: 100

vismResPartEgrPctBW: 100

vismResPartCtrlrID:2

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprsvpif

dsprsvpif

To display the Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) status of a specified connection, use the dsprsvpif command in the VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprsvpreq

dsprsvpreq

To display the data associated with a specified Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) request, use the dsprsvpreq command in the VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

dsprsvpreq ses-num request-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprsvpreq

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprsvpreqs

dsprsvpreqs

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display all Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)-known requests on the current VISM card, use the dsprsvpreqs command in the VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

dsprsvpreqs

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC

A request is a generated outgoing reservation message. Use the dsprsvpresvs command to display incoming or locally created reservations.

The following example shows that the RSVP-known request on the current VISM card is displayed:

dsprsvpreqs

Sess Resv From ToProt DPort SPort Interval Serv BPS

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 0 11.11.11.1 12.12.12.1 IP 49152 49152 30000 Guaranteed 96000

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprsvpresv

dsprsvpresv

To display all data associated with a Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) bandwidth reservation, use the dsprsvpresv command in the VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

dsprsvpresv ses-num resv-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprsvpresv

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprsvpresvs

dsprsvpresvs

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display all incoming Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)-known bandwidth reservations on the current VISM card, use the dsprsvpresvs command in the VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

dsprsvpresvs

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC

This command displays data for reservations that are incoming or created by application programming interface (API) calls. Use the dsprsvpreqs command to display data for outgoing reservations???requests.

The following example shows that all incoming RSVP-known bandwidth reservations are displayed:

dsprsvpresvs

Sess Resv From ToProt DPort SPort Interval Serv BPS

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprsvpsender

dsprsvpsender

To display all data associated with a specified Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) path state, use the dsprsvpsender command in the VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

dsprsvpsender ses-num sender-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprsvpsenders

dsprsvpsenders

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display all Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)-known path states on the current VISM card, use the dsprsvpsenders command in the VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

dsprsvpsenders

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that all RSVP-known path states on the current VISM card are displayed:

dsprsvpsenders

Session Sender From ToProt DPort SPort BPS

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprtpcnt

dsprtpcnt

To display the bearer counters (statistics) for a specific Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) VoIP trunking connection, use the dsprtpcnt command in the VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

dsprtpcnt conn-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprtpcnt

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprtpcon

dsprtpcon

To display the configuration data of a specified static Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) VoIP trunking connection, use the dsprtpcon command in the VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

dsprtpcon conn-num

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the configuration data for the static RTP connection number 106 is displayed:

dsprtpcon 106

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprtpcon

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprtpconnstat

dsprtpconnstat

To display the Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) connection statistics for a specified endpoint, use the dsprtpconnstat command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL1 SVC, switched AAL2 SVC, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

dsprtpconnstat endpt-num

???For template number 1:

???For VISM, from 1 to 145

???For VISM-PR T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM-PR E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 2:

???For VISM T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 3:

???For VISM, from 1 to 120

???For VISM-PR T1, from 1 to 192

???For VISM-PR E1, from 1 to 248

???For template number 4:

???For VISM-PR, from 1 to 144

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprtpconnstat

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprtpcons

dsprtpcons

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the configuration data of all static Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) VoIP trunking connections, use the dsprtpcons command in the VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

dsprtpcons

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the configuration data for all static RTP connections are displayed:

dsprtpcons

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprtpcons

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprudptrunk

dsprudptrunk

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the configuration data of a specified ISDN PRI backhaul Reliable User Datagram Protocol (RUDP) session, use the dsprudptrunk command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dsprudptrunk session-num

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the configuration data of ISDN PRI backhaul RUDP session number 43 is displayed:

dsprudptrunk 43

Trans State Timeout:2000

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprudptrunk

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprudptrunks

dsprudptrunks

To display the configuration data of all ISDN PRI backhaul Reliable User Datagram Protocol (RUDP) sessions, use the dsprudptrunks command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dsprudptrunks

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsprudptrunks

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspsarcnt

dspsarcnt

To display the segmentation and reassembly (SAR) counter values for a specified channel, use the dspsarcnt command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspsarcnts

dspsarcnts

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspsarmsgcnt

dspsarmsgcnt

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the segmentation and reassembly (SAR) control message counter values for a VISM card, use the dspsarmsgcnt command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspsarmsgcnt

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the SAR control message counter values for the current VISM card are displayed:

dspsarmsgcnt

RiscXmtCtrlMsg:83606

RiscRcvCtrlMsg:83606

SARXmtCtrlMsg:83445

SARRcvCtrlMsg:83606

SARCtrlMsgDiscLenErr: 0

SARCtrlMsgDiscCRCErr: 0

SARCtrlMsgDiscUnknownChan: 0

SARCtrlMsgLastUnknownChan: 0

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspses

dspses

To display the configuration data of a Primary Rate Interface (PRI) backhaul session, use the dspses command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating mode.

dspses session-num

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspsesgrp

dspsesgrp

To display configuration data of a Primary Rate Interface (PRI) backhaul session group, use the dspsesgrp command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspsesgrps

dspsesgrps

To display configuration data about all Primary Rate Interface (PRI) backhaul session groups, use the dspsesgrps command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspsesgrps

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

addsesgrp Adds a PRI backhaul session group between a VISM card and a call agent.

delsesgrp Deletes a PRI backhaul session group.

dspsesgrp Displays configuration data of a PRI backhaul session group.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspsess

dspsess

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspsesset

dspsesset

To display configuration data about a specified Primary Rate Interface (PRI) backhaul session set, use the dspsesset command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspsesset set-num

Note Currently, only session set number 1 is supported.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspsesstat

dspsesstat

To display configuration data about Primary Rate Interface (PRI) backhaul session statistics (counters), use the dspsesstat command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspslipcnt

dspslipcnt

To display the current clock slip counters for a specified VISM card line, use the dspslipcnt command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL1 SVC, switched AAL2 SVC, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspsrcpcnt

dspsrcpcnt

To display the Simple Resource Control Protocol (SRCP) message counters (statistics) for a specified call agent, use the dspsrcpcnt command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspsrcpcnts

dspsrcpcnts

To display the Simple Resource Control Protocol (SRCP) message counters (statistics) for all known call agents, use the dspsrcpcnts command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspsrcpcnts

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspsrcppeer

dspsrcppeer

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

To display the peer configuration data for a specified Simple Resource Control Protocol (SRCP) peer (call agent), use the dspsrcppeer command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspsrcppeer peer-num

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the peer configuration data for the call agent identified by peer number 4 is displayed:

dspsrcppeer 4

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspsrcppeergrpparams

dspsrcppeergrpparams

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the Simple Resource Control Protocol (SRCP) parameters for all call agent redundancy groups that have SRCP added, use the dspsrcppeergrpparams command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspsrcppeergrpparams

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the SRCP parameters for all call agent redundancy groups that have SRCP added are displayed:

dspsrcppeergrpparams

Mgc Grp Num HeartbeatIntv TimeSinceHeartbeat MaxPdu

----------- ------------- ------------------- ------

112004096

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspsrcppeers

dspsrcppeers

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

To display the peer configuration data for all known Simple Resource Control Protocol (SRCP) peers (call agents), use the dspsrcppeers command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspsrcppeers

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the configuration data for all known SRCP peers (call agents) are displayed:

dspsrcppeers

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspsrcpport

dspsrcpport

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Related Commands

To display the local User Datagram Protocol (UDP) port number used by the Simple Resource Control Protocol (SRCP) on VISM, use the dspsrcpport command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspsrcpport

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the local UDP port number used by the SRCP is displayed:

dspsrcpport

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspsrcpretry

dspsrcpretry

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the VISM card level Simple Resource Control Protocol (SRCP) retransmission parameters???maximum number of retransmission attempts, minimum timeout, and maximum timeout???use the dspsrcpretry command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspsrcpretry

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the VISM card level SRCP retransmission parameters are displayed:

dspsrcpretry

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspt38fxlco

dspt38fxlco

To display the fax handling instructions configured for a specified line, use the dspt38fxlco command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspt38fxlcos

dspt38fxlcos

To display the fax handling instructions for all lines on the current VISM card, use the dspt38fxlcos command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspt38fxlcos

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspt38nsetimeout

dspt38nsetimeout

To display a specified configured line with a length of time in which to wait for a remote acknowledgment of the offer to switch to fax transfer mode, use the dspt38nsetimeout command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspt38nsetimeout line-num

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspt38nsetimeouts

dspt38nsetimeouts

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display all configured lines with a length of time in which to wait for a remote acknowledgment of the offer to switch to fax transfer mode, use the dspt38nsetimeouts command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspt38nsetimeouts

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the length of time in which to wait for a remote acknowledgment of the offer to switch to fax transfer mode configured for all lines on the current VISM card is displayed:

dspt38nsetimeouts

Line_Number NSE Timeout (ms)

----------- ----------------

11000

21000

.

.

.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspt38params

dspt38params

To display the T.38 fax transfer parameters for a specified line, use the dspt38params command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsptaskinfo

dsptaskinfo

To display data about currently operating tasks, use the dsptaskinfo command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dsptaskinfo

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsptonebuiltinplans

dsptonebuiltinplans

To display all built-in (preconfigured) tone plans on the current VISM card, use the dsptonebuiltinplans command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dsptonebuiltinplans

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Usage Guidelines VISM supports version 1 of the country and region built-in tone plans listed in Table 5-3.

Number of Built-In Tone Plans = 48.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsptonebuiltinplans

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsptoneplan

dsptoneplan

To display the tone configuration of a specified tone plan???either a built-in (preconfigured) or a provisional tone plan???use the dsptoneplan command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dsptoneplan tonep-region tonep-version

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsptoneplan

dsplntoneplan Displays the tone plan configuration of a specified VISM card line.

dsplntonetimeout Displays the configured timeout periods for all call progress tones of a specified VISM card line.

dsptonebuiltinplans Displays all preconfigured (built-in) tone plans on the current VISM card.

dsptoneplans Displays the tone configuration of all tone plans???either preconfigured (built-in) or user-added tone plans.

dsptoneprovplans Displays all user-added (provisional) tone plans.

dsptoneregionplans Displays a list of all tone plans for the countries and regions whose name partially or completely matches the name you supply.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsptoneplans

dsptoneplans

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

To display the tone configuration of all tone plans???either built-in (preconfigured) or provisional tone plans???use the dsptoneplans command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dsptoneplans

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

This command displays the status of tone plans in the following ways:

???Configure???For a built-in (preconfigured) tone plan, and a provisional tone plan that is downloaded properly and added to the system.

???Lost File???For a provisional tone plan that is not downloaded properly or for a tone plan that is not the proper one.

???Reloading???For a provisional tone plan that is currently downloading.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsptoneplans

dsplntonetimeout Displays the configured timeout periods for all call progress tones of a specified VISM card line.

dsptonebuiltinplans Displays all preconfigured (built-in) tone plans on the current VISM card.

dsptoneplan Displays the tone configuration of a specified tone plan???either a preconfigured (built-in) or user-added tone plan.

dsptoneprovplans Displays all user-added (provisional) tone plans.

dsptoneregionplans Displays a list of all tone plans for the countries and regions whose name partially or completely matches the name you supply.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsptoneprovplans

dsptoneprovplans

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

To display all provisional tone plans, use the dsptoneprovplans command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dsptoneprovplans

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

This command displays the status of tone plans in the following ways:

???Configure???Downloaded properly and added to the system.

???Lost File???Not downloaded properly or for a tone plan that is not the proper one.

???Reloading???Currently downloading.

.

.

Number of Provisionable Tone Plans = 1.

Number of un-configured Tone Plans = 31.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsptoneprovplans

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsptoneregionplans

dsptoneregionplans

To display a list of all tone plans for the countries and regions whose name partially or completely matches the name you supply, use the dsptoneregionplans command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dsptoneregionplans tonep-region

Number of Matching Tone Plans = 2.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dsptoneregionplans

dsptonebuiltinplans Displays all preconfigured (built-in) tone plans on the current VISM card.

dsptoneplan Displays the tone configuration of a specified tone plan???either a preconfigured (built-in) or user-added tone plan.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspvbdcodec

dspvbdcodec

cnfvbdcodec Configures the VBD upspeed codec.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspvbdpol

dspvbdpol

To display the VISM card level voiceband data (VBD) policies for fax/modem upspeed connection admission control (CAC) failure and fax/modem carrier loss for calls, use the dspvbdpol command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspvbdpol

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspvismdn

dspvismdn

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspvismip

dspvismip

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspvismparam

dspvismparam

To display VISM card configuration parameters, use the dspvismparam command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspvismparam

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspvismparam

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspvoipparams

dspvoipparams

To display the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode parameters, use the dspvoipparams command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspvoipparams

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking

Usage Guidelines The following parameters are displayed when you use this command:

???DTMF relay status???Displays whether the CAS bits are configured to be relayed to the other endpoint.

???CAS bits transport status???Displays whether the DTMF tones are configured to be relayed to the other endpoint.

???VAD timer value???Displays the hangover time before silence compression is invoked.

???Event negotiation policy???None, proprietary, or all.

???Silence insertion descriptor (SID) payload type.

cnfvoiptransparams Configures the VoIP transportation parameters.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpbt

dspxgcpbt

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the default network type, virtual channel (VC) type, and connection type of the current VISM card, use the dspxgcpbt command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

dspxgcpbt

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the default network type, VC type, and connection type of the current VISM card are displayed:

dspxgcpbt

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpcalls

dspxgcpcalls

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the xGCP call ID, connection ID, and endpoint name corresponding to each call agent established connection on the gateway, use the dspxgcpcalls command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspxgcpcalls

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

If more than one xGCP connection ID is associated with the same call ID, each connection ID appears on a separate line in the display.

The following example shows that the xGCP call IDs, connection IDs, and endpoint names corresponding to all call agent established connections on the gateway are displayed:

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpcids

dspxgcpcids

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the logical channel number (LCN), channel identification number (CID), xGCP connection ID, endpoint name, and call ID corresponding to each call agent established AAL2 connection on the gateway, use the dspxgcpcids command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspxgcpcids

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the xGCP connection CID configuration data for each call agent established AAL2 connection on the gateway is displayed:

dspxgcpcids

delxgcpcon Deletes an xGCP connection specified by the xGCP connection identification number.

dspxgcpcon Displays the attributes associated with a call agent established connection.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpcids

Command Description

dspxgcpcons Displays the xGCP connection ID, endpoint name, and call ID corresponding to each call agent established connection on the gateway.

dspxgcpendpts Displays the xGCP endpoint names of all endpoints added with the addendpt command, or the SNMP equivalent.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpcnf

dspxgcpcnf

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display previously configured Simple Gateway Control Protocol (SGCP)/Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) timeout and retransmission count values, use the dspxgcpcnf command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspxgcpcnf

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the SGCP/MGCP timeout and retransmission count values are displayed:

dspxgcpcnf

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpcnt

dspxgcpcnt

To display the Simple Gateway Control Protocol (SGCP)/Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) message statistics for a specified call agent, use the dspxgcpcnt command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspxgcpcnts Displays the SGCP/MGCP message statistics for all known call agents.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpcnts

dspxgcpcnts

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the Simple Gateway Control Protocol (SGCP)/Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) message statistics for all known call agents, use the dspxgcpcnts command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspxgcpcnts

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the SGCP/MGCP messages statistics for all known call agents are displayed:

dspxgcpcnts

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpcon

dspxgcpcon

To display the attributes associated with a call agent established connection, use the dspxgcpcon command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspxgcpcon conn-id display-level

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpcon

The following example shows that the detailed level of attributes associated with the call agent identified by the connection identification number 4C5B are displayed:

dspxgcpcon 4c5b 2

*********************************************************

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpcon

Related Commands Command Description

delxgcpcon Deletes an xGCP connection specified by the xGCP connection identification number.

dspxgcpcids Displays the LCN, CID, xGCP connection ID, endpoint name, and call ID corresponding to each call agent established AAL2 connection on the gateway.

dspxgcpcons Displays the xGCP connection identification number, endpoint name, and call identification number corresponding to each call agent established connection on the gateway.

dspxgcpendpts Displays the xGCP endpoint names of all endpoints added with the addendpt command, or the SNMP equivalent.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpcons

dspxgcpcons

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the xGCP connection identification number, endpoint name, and call identification number corresponding to each call agent established connection on the gateway, use the dspxgcpcons command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspxgcpcons

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the xGCP connection identification number, endpoint name, and call identification number of each call agent established connection on the gateway are displayed:

dspxgcpcons

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpdefpkg

dspxgcpdefpkg

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpdetailcnt

dspxgcpdetailcnt

To display Simple Gateway Control Protocol (SGCP)/Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) details of message statistics exchanged between VISM and a specified call agent, use the dspxgcpdetailcnt command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspxgcpdetailcnts Displays SGCP/MGCP details of message statistics exchanged between VISM and all known call agents.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpdetailcnts

dspxgcpdetailcnts

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display Simple Gateway Control Protocol (SGCP)/Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) details of message statistics exchanged between VISM and all known call agents, use the dspxgcpdetailcnts command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspxgcpdetailcnts

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the SGCP/MGCP details of message statistics exchanged between VISM and all known call agents are displayed:

dspxgcpdetailcnts

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpendpt

dspxgcpendpt

To display the attributes associated with an endpoint added using the addendpt command, or the SNMP equivalent, use the dspxgcpendpt command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpendpt

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpendptcons

dspxgcpendptcons

To display the attributes of all connections associated with an endpoint added using the addendpt command, or the SNMP equivalent, use the dspxgcpendptcons command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpendptcons

Related Commands Command Description

delxgcpcon Deletes an xGCP connection specified by the xGCP connection identification number.

dspxgcpcids Displays the LCN, CID, xGCP connection ID, endpoint name, and call ID corresponding to each call agent established AAL2 connection on the gateway.

dspxgcpcon Displays the attributes associated with a call agent established connection.

dspxgcpcons Displays the xGCP connection ID, endpoint name and call ID corresponding to each call agent established connection on the gateway.

dspxgcpendpt Displays the xGCP endpoint names corresponding to each endpoint number.

dspxgcpendpts Displays the xGCP endpoint name corresponding to each endpoint added using the addendpt command or the SNMP equivalent.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpendpts

dspxgcpendpts

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

To display the xGCP endpoint names corresponding to each endpoint which has been added using the addendpt command, or the SNMP equivalent, use the dspxgcpendpts command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspxgcpendpts

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

The xGCP endpoint name is displayed with this command regardless of whether there are call agent established connections associated with the endpoint. If there are call agent established connections associated with the endpoint, the corresponding xGCP connection identification number and call identification number appear on the same line as the endpoint name.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcperrcnt

dspxgcperrcnt

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the Simple Gateway Control Protocol (SGCP)/Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP) error counts for both unsupported protocol versions and unrecognized packets, use the dspxgcperrcnt command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspxgcperrcnt

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the xGCP error counts for unsupported protocol versions and unrecognized packets are displayed:

dspxgcperrcnt

Number of msg. for an unsupported protocol version : 0

Number of unrecognized packets : 0

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpinterops

dspxgcpinterops

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcplncons

dspxgcplncons

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display the DS0s with active xGCP connections, the number of connections for each line, and the number of active calls for each card, use the dspxgcplncons command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspxgcplncons

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the DS0s with active xGCP connections, the number of connections for each line, and the number of active calls for each card are displayed:

dspxgcplncons

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcppeers

dspxgcppeers

Syntax Description

Command Modes

Usage Guidelines

Examples

To display all the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) peer ports used by the Simple Gateway Control Protocol (SGCP) or the Media Gateway Control Protocol (MGCP), use the dspxgcppeers command in the VoIP switching/trunking operating mode.

dspxgcppeers

This command has no arguments or keywords.

VoIP switching/trunking

Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

The following example shows that the UDP ports used by xGCP are displayed:

dspxgcppeers

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcppersistevts

dspxgcppersistevts

To display all active persistent xGCP events, use the dspxgcppersistevts command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspxgcppersistevts

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC

Usage Guidelines Follow standard CLI procedures for this command.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpport

dspxgcpport

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

dspxgcpretry

dspxgcpretry

To display the current xGCP retransmission parameters???retry (retransmission) count, minimum timeout value, and maximum timeout value???use the dspxgcpretry command in the VoIP switching/trunking and switched AAL2 PVC operating modes.

dspxgcpretry

cnfxgcpretry Configures VISM minimum and maximum request timeouts and retransmission attempts for communication with the associated call agent.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

Help

Help

To display, in an alphabetical list, all commands associated with the current VISM card, use the Help command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Help

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Usage Guidelines This command is case sensitive???Help.

Note You cannot use this command to obtain details about a specific command.

Note The list displayed in this example is a partial list???your results return a greater number of associated commands.

Help

?

addcasvar addccs addcid

.

.

.

dspxgcppersistevts dspxgcpport dspxgcpretry

Help pinglndsp tstcon tstdelay version

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

pinglndsp

pinglndsp

To display the digital signal processor (DSP) configuration data and status for all endpoints on a specified line, use the pinglndsp command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

tstdelay

tstdelay

To test the delay on a specified connection, use the tstdelay command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

upcon

upcon

To configure a specified connection up, allowing traffic to be passed to the specified connection, use the upcon command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL1 SVC, switched AAL2 SVC, switched AAL2 PVC, AAL2 trunking, VoIP and switched ATM AAL1 SVC operating modes.

upcon lcn

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

version

version

To display version-related data???such as firmware version, operating system kernel version, date of the software build???for the current VISM card, use the version command in the VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking operating modes.

version

Syntax Description This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes VoIP switching/trunking, switched AAL2 PVC, and AAL2 trunking

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

version

Boot line:

Note The display from this command is different than the one that is shown here if you are using CALEA.

Related Commands There are no related commands.

Chapter 5 CLI Commands

version

C H A P T E R 6

Troubleshooting Tips

Use the following troubleshooting tools and techniques to assist you in maintaining your VISM card:

??????VISM Card LEDs??? section on page 6-1

??????VISM and PXM Display, Log, and Diagnostic Loopback Path CLI Commands??? section on page 6-2

??????VISM Alarms??? section on page 6-5

??????UNIX Snoop Trace Tool??? section on page 6-5

??????Symptoms and Solutions??? section on page 6-5

VISM Card LEDs

The VISM card uses the following three card status LEDs (see Figure 6-1) to indicate certain states:

???ACT???Green indicates the active state.

???STBY???Orange, or blinking orange, indicates one of the following:

???VISM is in the standby state.

???VISM is in the mismatch state.

???VISM card DSPs are currently involved in the VISM card bootup.

???FAIL???Red indicates the failure state, or certain stages of the bootup process.

The VISM card uses eight line status LEDs (see Figure 6-1) to indicate the following states of the eight T1 or E1 ports on the VISM back card:

???Green???A line has been added and there is no alarm on that line.

???Orange???A line has been added and there is a yellow alarm condition on the line.

???Red???A line has been added and there is one of the following conditions on the line:

???Loss of signal (LOS) (red alarm condition)

???Loss of frame (LOF)

???Alarm indication signal (AIS)

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Tips

VISM and PXM Display, Log, and Diagnostic Loopback Path CLI Commands

Figure 6-1 VISM Front Card LEDs

Card status LEDs

Line LEDs

E1 Front Card

VISM and PXM Display, Log, and Diagnostic Loopback Path CLI Commands

You can use the following commands to troubleshoot your VISM card:

???The VISM dspcd command

???The PXM dsplog command

???PXM diagnostic loopback commands

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Tips

VISM and PXM Display, Log, and Diagnostic Loopback Path CLI Commands

Note Refer to the Cisco MGX 8000 Series platform command reference guides for more information on PXM commands.

VISM Display Card CLI Command

Use the VISM dspcd command to display the following types of information about your current VISM card:

???State of the VISM card

???Type of VISM card

???Version number and part numbers

???Daughter card version numbers and part numbers

The following example shows the results of a typical dspcd command:

PXM Display Log CLI Command

Use the PXM dsplog command to display useful information for troubleshooting your VISM card. The log is maintained by the PXM. A VISM entry is displayed in the log in the following format:

???Date and time of the log

???Slot number of the VISM card from which a message is logged

???The process on the VISM card that logged that message

???Severity of the message:

???1 = Fatal error which causes the card to reboot

???6 = All other errors

???A log message description

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Tips

VISM and PXM Display, Log, and Diagnostic Loopback Path CLI Commands

The following example shows the results of a typical dsplog command:

09/09/2001-02:09:01 03 cam VISM-6-9157 VISM got time from PXM

PXM Diagnostic Loopback Path CLI Commands

The VISM-8T1 and VISM-8E1 cards provide the capability for creating loopback paths for diagnostic purposes. Use the VISM and PXM diagnostic loopback CLI commands to troubleshoot your VISM cards. The following loopback configurations are possible:

???Local line loopback. Use the PXM addlnloop command to enable local line loopback on a line-by-line basis. Use the PXM dellnloop command to disable local line loopback.

???Remote line loopback. The PXM cnfbert command is a T1/E1 diagnostic test package which includes some loopback tests.

Use the BERT and loopback functions to test the integrity of T1 and E1 lines. You can use the PXM cnfbert command on the PXM to perform the following actions:

???Run BERT on a per-line basis on the VISM card.

???Put a VISM line on a TDM side loopback.

???Put a VISM line on a network side loopback.

???Cause the VISM to put test equipment residing on the far side into loopback.

???OAM loopback through the CPU toward the network (per VC). This loopback is enabled automatically; no PXM or VISM CLI commands are required.

???DS0 loopback, at the compression DSP toward the TDM side. Use the PXM addendptloop command to enable DS0 loopback on a DS0-by-DS0 basis. Use the PXM delendptloop command to disable DS0 loopbacks.

???VC remote loopback. Use the PXM addconloop command to enable VC remote loopbacks. Use the PXM delconloop command to disable remote loopbacks.

PXM1E and PXM 45 Display CLI Commands

Refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 Installation and Configuration Guide and the Cisco MGX 8000 Series Switch Command Reference for information on the following PXM1, PXM1E, and PXM45 card display commands.

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Tips

VISM Alarms

VISM Alarms

Table 6-1 describes VISM T1 and E1 card alarms.

Table 6-1 VISM T1 and E1 Card Alarms

1.LOS = Loss of service.

2.AIS = Alarm indication signal.

3.RAI = Remote alarm indicator.

4.LOF = Loss of frame.

Refer to T1.403 for DS1 and G.704 for E1 definitions of alarm states. Alarms are propagated to the remote end over the ATM network in accordance with ATM specifications.

UNIX Snoop Trace Tool

Use the UNIX snoop trace tool to assist in diagnosing a problem. The snoop command can determine if there is any activity between the VISM and the call agent. The following example shows the command and a typical resulting terminal display:

snoop -x 42 -ta <ip address of CA> port <udp port of CA> E.g snoop -x 42 -ta vismvsc1 port 2427

Symptoms and Solutions

This section includes possible solutions to the following possible symptoms:

??????VISM Card Did Not Become Active??? section on page 6-6

??????T1/E1 Configuration Mismatch??? section on page 6-6

??????DSP Download Failure??? section on page 6-7

??????VISM Front Card/Back Card Mismatch??? section on page 6-8

??????Cannot Use the cc Command to Access a VISM Card??? section on page 6-9

??????VISM Card Resets Intermittently??? section on page 6-9

??????VISM Card Does Not Accept a Firmware Download??? section on page 6-9

??????Echo Is Heard on a Voice Call??? section on page 6-9

??????VISM Card LEDs Are Not Lighted??? section on page 6-9

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Tips

Symptoms and Solutions

VISM Card Did Not Become Active

Investigate the following possible causes for a VISM card that does not become active:

???An E1 card is inserted in a slot where a T1 card was present, or a T1 card is inserted in a slot where an E1 card was present, resulting in configuration mismatch.

???The minimum number (five) of DSPs failed to download.

???A front card type does not match the back card type???if the front card is T1 and the back card is E1, or the front card is E1 and the back card is T1.

???The VISM card MIB image version does not match the PXM disk MIB image version.

T1/E1 Configuration Mismatch

Use the PXM dspcds command to identify a T1/E1 configuration mismatch, as follows:

Use the PXM dspsmcnf command to identify a T1/E1 configuration mismatch, as follows:

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Tips

Symptoms and Solutions

Use the PXM dsplog command to show a card mismatch log entry, logged by VISM card on slot 5, as follows:

09/09/2001-00:01:47 05 dsplog VISM-6-9025

VISM going to standby : Config. Mismatch between PXM and VISM

Use the VISM dspcd command to display the following information:

NODENAME.1.5.VISM8.s > dspcd

DSP Download Failure

Use the PXM dsplog command to determine if the minimum number (five) of the DSPs failed to download. The terminal displays results similar to the following:

If the number of DSPs (six in the above case) is greater than five, the card will fail to be in the active state. If this condition happens repeatedly, replace the card.

Use the following PXM dspcds command, and the results, to determine the current state of VISM DSPs:

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Tips

Symptoms and Solutions

VISM Front Card/Back Card Mismatch

Use the following PXM dsplog command to investigate a possible VISM front card/back card mismatch:

VISM going to standby : Config. Mismatch between ASC and VISMV

In a mismatch condition, use the PXM dspcds command to display the following type of information:

Use the VISM dspcd command to display the following types of information:

NODENAME.1.5.VISM8.s > dspcd

ModuleSlotNumber:5

FunctionModuleState: Mismatch

FunctionModuleType: VISM-8E1

FunctionModuleSerialNum: CAB0246014P

FunctionModuleHWRev: 0.0

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Tips

Symptoms and Solutions

Cannot Use the cc Command to Access a VISM Card

Use the PXM dspcds command to verify if the VISM card is in the active or standby state. If the VISM card is not in the active or standby state, you cannot use the cc command to access the card.

VISM Card Resets Intermittently

Investigate the following possibilities to determine why the VISM card is resetting intermittently:

???Bad hardware device on the card. Replace any corrupt hardware.

???Daughter card is not attached correctly to the VISM card. As a result, the VISM card is not able to maintain its abilities. Ensure that the daughter card is making electrical contact to the motherboard, and is mechanically secure.

VISM Card Does Not Accept a Firmware Download

There must be a VISM card in the slot to which firmware is being downloaded. Ensure that the VISM card is seated in the slot, and that it is making electrical contacts to the backplane.

The card must be in either the active or boot state. Confirm this is the case and try again.

Echo Is Heard on a Voice Call

Ensure that the call has the ECAN feature enabled. If the echo delay is longer than the provision tail length, ECAN does not work. Use the VISM cnfecantail command to configure a larger value for the tail length.

VISM Card LEDs Are Not Lighted

The VISM card may not be inserted completely in the slot. Ensure that the VISM card is seated in the slot correctly, with top and bottom half portions of the VISM card making electrical contact with the backplane.

Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Tips

Symptoms and Solutions

Firmware Does Not See the Card Insert Bit Status As Set

This symptom can also indicate a bad VISM card or bad MGX slot.

A P P E N D I X A

VISM and VISM-PR Card Clocking Options

An MGX 8000 Series platform, consisting of PXM and VISM cards, should have one primary clocking source. To avoid conflicts and to ensure proper operation, it is important that the settings for clocking options in both card types are considered together. You must use one of the following primary clocking source options, which are supported by the VISM/PXM interface:

???PXM1, PXM1E, and PXM45 cards???Provides clocking for all VISM cards in the chassis.

???A VISM card???Provides clocking for the PXM1, which then provides clocking to the entire chassis.

???A VISM-PR card???Provides clocking for the PXM1E or PXM45 card, which then provides clocking to the entire chassis.

PXM1 Card as Primary Clocking Source

Figure A-1 shows the PXM card primary clocking source option in which the clock source originates at the PXM side of the VISM/PXM interface.

Appendix A VISM and VISM-PR Card Clocking Options

PXM1 Card as Primary Clocking Source

The PXM card option allows you to configure the clocking source origination from one of the following sources:

???An external BITS clock on the PXM card???s T1 or E1 back card port.

???An external OC3 signal on a PXM SONET back card port.

???The PXM card???s internal crystal (default).

The internal crystal is the default and is set as the primary clock source automatically when power is applied to the chassis.

To use one of the other two clocking sources, complete the following steps:

Step 1 Use the cnfclksrc command to configure the clocking source???external BITS clock or external OC3 signal.

Step 2 Use the cnfln command to configure all VISM lines for local clocking.

The PXM card option makes the PXM the clock source for the all cards in the chassis. The VISM cards then use this clocking to provide clocking for their associated T1 or E1 lines. Refer to Chapter 5, ???CLI Commands,??? for more information on VISM commands.

Refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 Installation and Configuration Guide and the Cisco MGX 8000 Series Switch Command Reference for information on the following PXM card clocking commands:

???cnfcbclk

???cnfextclk

???cnfsrmclksrc

???dspcbclk

???dspclkinfo

???dspclksrc

???dspcurclk

Appendix A VISM and VISM-PR Card Clocking Options

VISM Card as Primary Clocking Source

VISM Card as Primary Clocking Source

Figure A-2 shows the VISM card primary clocking source option in which the clock source originates at the VISM side of the VISM/PXM interface.

Figure A-2 VISM Configured for Loop Clocking

VISM

VISM line #1 configured for loop clocking, all other VISM lines (including all

Network (OC3)

Internal crystal

lines on other VISM cards) configured for local clocking

MGX clock source configured for: Service Module

51225

The VISM card option originates clocking from one of the T1 or E1 lines on one of the VISM cards.

To configure the VISM card as the primary clocking source, complete the following steps:

Step 1 Use the cnfln command to configure line number 1???the line that is receiving the clocking source???for loop clocking.

Step 2 Use the cnfln command to configure all remaining T1 or E1 lines on all VISM cards in the chassis for local clocking.

Step 3 Use the cnfclksrc command to configure the PXM card as a service module clocking source and specify VISM and its clocking line (line number 1) as the clocking source.

Note The VISM card allows you to configure the clock source on line 1 only. The VISM-PR card does not have this requirement.

VISM-PR Card as Primary Clocking Source

The VISM-PR card allows you to configure primary clocking from the following sources:

???Network clock???the local clock for the PXM1, PXM1E, or PXM45 module

???Any VISM-PR T1 or E1 line

???On-board oscillator

Appendix A VISM and VISM-PR Card Clocking Options

PXM1E or PXM45 Card as Primary Clocking Source

To configure the VISM-PR card as the primary clocking source, complete the following steps:

Step 1 Use the cnfln command to configure a line number???the line that is receiving the clocking source???for loop clocking.

Step 2 Use the cnfln command to configure all remaining T1 or E1 lines on all VISM cards in the chassis for local clocking.

Step 3 Use the cnfclksrc command to configure the PXM card as a service module clocking source and specify VISM and its clocking line as the clocking source.

You cannot delete a line that is configured as the clock source. You must first configure the line to not be the clock source and then you can delete the line.

Refer to Chapter 5, ???CLI Commands,??? for more information on VISM commands.

PXM1E or PXM45 Card as Primary Clocking Source

Use the cnfncdpclksrc command to configure the PXM1E or PXM45 card as the primary clock source. Refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 Installation and Configuration Guide and the Cisco MGX 8000 Series Switch Command Reference for configuration instructions. Use the following commands to display and verify your configuration:

???dspncdpclkinfo

???dspncdpclksrc

Revertive and Nonrevertive Clocking

Clocking can be either revertive or nonrevertive. If your MGX switch is configured for a clock source from a BITS source or PXM line source and the source line goes into the alarm state, a revertive or nonrevertive recovery occurs.

???Revertive clocking???If a node is configured and the clock source fails (due to a physical failure such as a loss of signal, the clock frequency drifts out of specification, or a bad frequency), the node abandons the clock source and finds an alternate clock source. When the original clock source repairs, the node automatically reverts to using the original clock source.

???Nonrevertive clocking???Similar to revertive clocking, except that when the original clock source repairs, the node does not automatically revert to the original clock source.

Appendix A VISM and VISM-PR Card Clocking Options

Revertive and Nonrevertive Clocking

Revertive and nonrevertive clocking depends upon the processor module back card used and the clocking source specified. See Table A-1 to determine if your clocking is revertive or nonrevertive in your network configuration.

To make a nonrevertive clock source usable after it has failed, you must use the cnfclksrc command to change that particular clock source, and then use the cnfclksrc command again to configure it back. Refer to Chapter 5, ???CLI Commands,??? for more information on CLI commands.

Appendix A VISM and VISM-PR Card Clocking Options

Revertive and Nonrevertive Clocking

A P P E N D I X B

VISM and VISM-PR???3.0 Specifications

VISM Card Specifications

???ATM layer: Per ITU standards I.361 and ATM UNI v3.1

???AAL layer: AAL5 as per standard I.363.

VISM Card Physical Interface Specifications and Applicable

Standards

Physical Layer Interface T1:

???Line Rate: 1.544 Mbps +/??? 50 bps.

???Line Interface Connector: Balanced 100-ohm RJ-48C.

???Synchronization: The transmit clock can be selected from either the looped clock or the node???s clock.

???Line Code: Bipolar 8 zero substitution (B8ZS) per ANSI T1.408 and AMI.

???Line Framing: Extended Superframe Format (ESF 24-frame multiframe) per ANSI T1.408.

???Input Jitter Tolerance: Per ATT TR 62411.

???Output Jitter Generation: Per ATT TR 62411 using normal mode synchronization.

???Physical Layer Alarms: LOS, LOF, AIS, RAI.

Physical Layer Interface E1:

???Line Rate: 2.048 Mbps +/- 50 bps.

???Line Interface Connector: Balanced 120-ohm RJ-48C, Unbalanced 75-ohm SMB.

???Synchronization: The transmit clock can be selected from either the looped clock or the node???s clock.

???Line Code: HDB3 (E1) and AMI.

???Line Framing: 16-frame multiframe per G.704.

???Input Jitter Tolerance: As specified in ITU G.823 for 2.048 Mbps.

???Output Jitter Generation: As specified in ITU G.823 for 2.048 Mbps.

???Physical Layer Alarms: LOS, LOF, AIS, RAI.

Appendix B VISM and VISM-PR???3.0 Specifications

VISM Card Physical Interface Specifications and Applicable Standards

General VISM Card Standards

Card Status Indicator LEDs:

???Active (Green)

???Standby (Orange)

???Fail (Red)

Line status indicator LEDs:

???Active and Okay (Green)

???Active and Local Alarm (Red)

???Active and Remote Alarm (Orange)

Maintenance/Serviceability Features: Internal loopbacks, hot-pluggable.

VISM Front Card:

???AX-VISM-8T1/8E1???7.25 x 16.25 inches VISM Line Modules:

???AX-RJ48-8T1-LM???7.0 X 4.5 inches

???AX-R-RJ48-8T1-LM???7.0 X 4.5 inches

???AX-RJ48-8E1-LM???7.0 X 4.5 inches

???AX-R-RJ48-8E1-LM???7.0 X 4.5 inches

???AX-SMB-8E1-LM???7.0 X 4.5 inches

???AX-R-SMB-8E1-LM???7.0 X 4.5 inches Total VISM Power:

???48 VDC (100W estimated)

???5 VDC (25W estimated)

???3.3 VDC (43W estimated)

???2.5 VDC (12W estimated)

VISM Card Counters Specifications

T1/E1 Framers:

???OOF Count

???LCV Count

???FER Count

???CRC Error Count

Appendix B VISM and VISM-PR???3.0 Specifications

VISM-PR Card Specifications

RTP/RTCP:

???Number of packets received

???Number of packets transmitted

???Number of error packets received ATM Cells:

???Number of cells transmitted to cellbus

???Number of cells discarded due to intershelf alarm

???Number of cells transmitted with CLP bit set

???Number of AIS cells transmitted

???Number of FERF cells transmitted

???Number of end-to-end loop-back cells transmitted

???Number of segment loop-back cells transmitted

???Number of cells received from cellbus

???Number of cells received with CLP bit set

???Number of AIS cells received

???Number of FERF cells received

???Number of end-to-end loop-back cells received

???Number of segment loop-back cells received

???Number of OAM cells discarded due to CRC-10 error Diagnostics:

???Header of last cell with unknown LCN

VISM-PR Card Specifications

This section describes the card specifications that are unique to the VISM-PR card.

VISM-PR Card Features

The following features are contained in the VISM-PR card:

???Voice processing for all channels, using the following:

???Echo cancellation (ECAN)

???Digital Signal, level 0 (DS0) channels

???G.711u

???G.711a

???G.726-32k

???G.729a

???G.729ab

???Clear channel

Appendix B VISM and VISM-PR???3.0 Specifications

VISM-PR Card Specifications

???G.726-16k

???G.726-24k

???G.726-40k

???G.723-H

???G.723a-H

???G.723.1-L

???G.723.1a-L

???Tone detection and generation

???High functionality negotiated on demand for channels using the following:

???Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation (ADPCM)

???Code Excited Linear Prediction (CELP)

???Multiple packetization format in the following modes:

???Voice over IP (VoIP) switching/trunking

???VoIP with Real time Transport Protocol (RTP) in AAL5

???Switched AAL1 switched virtual circuits (SVC)

???Switched AAL2 SVC

???Switched AAL2 PVC???this operating mode is not supported in VISM Release 3.0

???AAL2 trunking

???VoIP and Switched ATM AAL1 SVC

???High-density aggregation, providing the following:

???8 T1/E1s of PCM voice

???192 T1 or 248 E1 DS0s per VISM-PR card

???4608 T1 or 5952 E1 DS0s per chassis shelf

???13824 T1 or 17856 E1 DS0s per rack (3 MGX 8000 series switch chassis per rack)

See Chapter 1, ???Overview of the VISM and VISM-PR Cards??? for information about installing and using VISM and VISM-PR cards in your MGX 8000 series switch chassis.

Symbols

? command 5-2

A

addmgcgrpentry command 3-18, 4-7, 4-46, 5-30 addmgcgrpprotocol command 4-7, 4-46, 5-31

I N D E X

addtoneplan command 5-45

addxgcppersistevt command 4-48, 5-48

alarms 6-5 application

AAL2 trunking 2-3

B

back cards

E1 1-3

T1 1-3

bulk distribution 1-8 bye command 4-5

C

cabling

Index

Index

5-327
5-328
5-326
5-312
5-310
5-308
5-307
5-306
5-305
5-294
5-290
5-292
1-16
5-278
4-14

Index

VISM clocking connecting cables 1-16 connection admission control

See CAC connectors

RJ-48

counters specification B-2

D

delmgcgrpprotocol command 5-264 delport command 5-266

delrscprtn command 5-267 delrtpcon command 5-268 delrudptrunk command 5-270 delses command 5-272 delsesgrp command 5-273 delsesset command 5-274 deltoneplan command 5-275

delxgcpcon command 5-277 delxgcppersistevt command dncon command 5-279 dspaal2params command 5-280 dspaal2profile command 5-281 dspalmcnf command 5-283 dspalmcnt command 5-285 dspalm command 5-282 dspalms command 5-287 dspannagetime 5-288 dspanncache command dspanncontrols command dspanndn command dspannpathprefix command 5-296

dspannpermanents command 5-298 dspannprefcodec command 5-300 dspannreqtimeout command 5-302 dspcacfailcntrs command 5-304 dspcalea command

dspcarddsp command dspcasendpts command dspcasglareattrib command

dspcaspackage command dspcasparamsource command

dspco4timer command dspcodecjtrdelays command dspcodecparams command

Index

Index

dspslipcnt command 5-428 dspsmcnf command 6-6 dspsrcpcnt command 5-429 dspsrcpcnts command 5-430 dspsrcppeer command 5-431

dspsrcppeergrpparams command 5-432 dspsrcppeers command 5-433 dspsrcpport command 5-434 dspsrcpretry command 5-435 dspss0loop command 5-344 dspt38fxlco command 5-436 dspt38fxlcos command 5-437 dspt38nsetimeout command 5-438 dspt38nsetimeouts command 5-439 dspt38params command 5-440 dsptaskinfo command 5-441 dsptonebuildplans command 5-442 dsptoneplan command 5-444 dsptoneplans command 5-446 dsptoneprovplans command 5-448 dsptoneregionplans command 5-450 dspvbdcodec command 5-452 dspvbdpol command 5-453

dspvismdn command 5-454 dspvismip command 5-455 dspvismparam command 4-8, 5-456 dspvoipparams command 5-458 dspxgcpbt command 5-459 dspxgcpcalls command 5-460 dspxgcpcids command 5-461 dspxgcpcnf command 5-463 dspxgcpcnt command 5-464 dspxgcpcnts command 5-465 dspxgcpcon command 5-466 dspxgcpcons command 5-469 dspxgcpdefpkg command 5-470 dspxgcpdetailcnt command 5-471 dspxgcpdetailcnts command 5-472 dspxgcpendpt command 5-473

dspxgcpendptcons command 5-475 dspxgcpendpts command 5-477 dspxgcperrcnt command 5-478 dspxgcpinterops command 5-479 dspxgcplncons command 5-480 dspxgcppeers command 5-481 dspxgcppersistevts command 5-482 dspxgcpport command 5-483 dspxgcpretry command 5-484

F

fax tone detection 3-4

H

Help command 5-485

I

VISM software upgrades 1-18

IS state 3-17

L

LED indicators 6-1 line modules B-2 logging in 4-3 logging out 4-5 logout command 4-5

Index

M

multiservice access application 2-3

N

newrev command 1-19 nonrevertive clocking A-4

O

OOS state 3-17

out-of-service state 3-17

P

parameters

pinglndsp command 5-486 power

applying 1-18

PXM1E 1-5, 1-8, 1-13, 1-14, 4-17, 4-60, A-4

PXM45 1-5, 1-13, 1-14, 4-17, 4-60, A-4

R

redundancy 1-8

removing

S

savesmcnf command 1-18

service states endpoints 3-17

session 3-10

snoop command 6-5

T

tandem switch offloading application 2-1

U

V

version command 5-490

VISM alarms 6-5

VISM card architecture 1-5

VISM log 6-3

VISM-PR 1-1, 1-3, 4-10, 4-17, A-3, B-3

VISM back card 1-17

Index